JP6676586B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result.

  Conventionally, in a pachinko gaming machine, a game is performed based on the winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening, and when a result of the game has a specific result mode, a special gaming state in which it is easy to win a special variable winning device is provided. What happens is common. In addition, a predetermined prize ball is given when a game ball wins a prize hole provided in a game area including a start winning prize port and a special variable prize apparatus (for example, see Patent Document 1). .

JP 2016-140468 A

  In such a gaming machine, there is a risk that an act of falsely trying to obtain a right to execute a game or a prize ball by making a mistake as if a gaming ball has won a winning port may be performed. An object of the present invention is to reliably detect fraud.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
A game area where game balls can flow down,
A prize area provided in the game area, in which a game ball can be awarded,
A prize detection sensor that can detect a game ball that has won the prize area,
An ejection sensor capable of detecting all game balls that have been fired in the game area and finished the game,
Control means for performing control based on a detection signal from the winning detection sensor and the discharge sensor,
The control means includes:
A total winning counter for counting the number of detections in the winning detection sensor,
A total discharge number counter for counting the number detected by the discharge sensor,
Calculating means for calculating a difference number in which the value of the total winning number counter exceeds the value of the total emission number counter;
A difference counter capable of holding the difference number calculated by the calculation means,
Based on the value of the total winning number counter or the total discharge number counter being updated, the calculating unit calculates the difference number, and the difference counter can hold the difference number. When a predetermined number is exceeded, the occurrence of an abnormality is reported.

  According to the present invention, fraudulent acts can be reliably detected.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the composition of a collective display. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 1 display. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 2 display. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 2 display. It is a figure explaining composition of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of variation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of variation pattern. It is a figure explaining an opening and closing pattern of a special fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining an opening and closing pattern of a special fluctuation winning device. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. 9 is a flowchart illustrating random number update processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / status monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a fraud & winning monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining an effect command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure starting port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure suspension information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 game process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 game process. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening switch monitoring process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 change start process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2-byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a high probability change frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 change process transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 change process transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 changing process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process shift setting processing 1. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 2 display processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process shift setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 display process shift setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart for explaining the processing shift setting processing 1 during opening of the special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process change setting process 2 during the opening of the special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during opening of a special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit operation | movement setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning a prize mouth residual ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a small hitting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining sphere process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED editing process. It is a flowchart explaining magnet fraud monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining the starting port 1 signal edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining a main award ball signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol determination frequency signal editing process. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display mode on a display device. It is a figure explaining the display mode at the time of switching of a main fluctuation design. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a skip effect. It is a time chart explaining a skip effect. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a skip effect process. It is a flowchart explaining a display switching process. It is a figure explaining the modification of a display. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example of an output mode of external information. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example of an output mode of external information. It is a flowchart explaining a status display edit output process. It is a flowchart explaining a difference calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an out-number error monitoring process. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change in a value of each counter area. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern table according to a first modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern table according to a first modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting processing in the 1st modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change in the value of each counter area in a second modification. It is a flowchart explaining the winning number counter update process in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the state display edit output processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the state display edit output processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the winning number counter update process in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the difference calculation process in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the state display edit output processing in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the out number error monitoring processing in the fourth modification. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change in a value of each counter area in a fourth modification.

<First embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage section (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and notify when an abnormality has occurred (for example, when a dispensing abnormality has occurred, the lamp, LED, and the like are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19 a that emits sound (for example, sound effect). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b notify the details of the abnormality by voice. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp for payment abnormality notification in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15. FIG.

  An upper plate 21 (reservoir plate) for supplying game balls to a hit ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are provided below the front frame 12. An outlet 22 for the upper plate ball flowing out, a lower plate (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball firing device, and the like are provided. Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, an effect button 25 including an effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from a player is provided. A touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from a player is provided on an upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12. In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25. However, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  On the right side of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, an ejection button operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball firing device moves the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), an effect or the like in which the operation of the player is interposed is performed. It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is configured to be surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. Further, on the left side of the game area 32, a guide wall 491 is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 and forms a guide path 490 for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32.

  In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is mounted in a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent game balls from jumping from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (CRT). In a region (display region) where an image on the display screen can be displayed, a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), information relating to a game such as a character that produces a special figure variable display game and a background image that enhances the rendering effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are displayed in a variable manner (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that performs a game effect by operating. The board presentation device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol start gate (general symbol start gate) 34 for giving a start condition of the general symbol change display game. The game ball that has won the ordinary figure starting gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 12). Further, two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the left side below the center case 40 in the game area 32. The gaming balls that have won the general winning opening 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 12).

  Below the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) and a second special figure change display for giving a start condition of a first special figure change display game (special figure 1 change display game). A winning device 90 having a second start winning opening 97 (start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition of a game (a special figure 2 variable display game) is provided. The winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 for alternately distributing the game balls flowing into the upper inflow port 91 to the first starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 97 therein. The distribution member 92 is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in the front-rear direction. The tilting direction changes according to the weight of the flowing game ball, and the first start winning opening 36 on the left and the second on the right. The game balls are alternately distributed to the starting winning opening 97. A game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 12), and a game ball that has won the second starting winning opening 97 is a starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 12). Is detected by Further, below the prize device 90, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize port or the like is provided.

  On the right side of the center case 40, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) for giving a start condition of the second special figure variable display game. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened by turning the upper end side in a direction of falling rightward and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. The movable member 37b is always The closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) is maintained, which is almost vertical and in which the game ball cannot flow. Then, when the result of the normal-floating display game is a predetermined stop display mode, the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 12) as a driving device rotates so that the upper end side is tilted to the right, and the normal fluctuation display game is performed. It can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for a player) in which a game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 12). It should be noted that it is also possible to make it possible to win even when the normal variable winning device 37 is in the closed state, and to make it harder to win in the closed state than in the open state.

  On the right side of the normal fluctuation prize device 37, there is formed a downflow path 615 that is covered with a transparent cover on the front side and communicates up and down, and game balls that have not won the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 pass through the downflow path 615. Flow down to A guide 616 is provided below the downflow path 615. The guiding portion 616 has an upper surface 617 formed as an inclined surface that is lowered to the left. The guiding ball 616 receives a downwardly flowing game ball with the upper surface 617 and guides the game ball to the left where the special fluctuation winning device 38 exists. In addition, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information about the special figure change display game.

  The information display device 630 includes a first information display unit that displays the number of first start memories that are the right to execute the first special figure variable display game, and a second start memory that is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game. And a second information display unit for displaying the number of. In addition, the special special figure variable display game corresponding to the first special figure variable display game is displayed by the fourth symbol separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the first to third symbols on the display device 41. The third special information display unit and the decoration special figure 2 change corresponding to the second special figure change display game by the fourth design separately from the decoration special figure change display game displayed by the first to third designs on the display device 41. A fourth information display unit for displaying a display game is provided.

  The first information display unit and the second information display unit each include two light emitting members, and the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit each include one light emitting member. In the second display device, these six light emitting members are arranged in two rows on the left and right in three by three. The upper two light emitting members in the right column constitute a first information display unit, and the upper two light emitting members in the left column constitute a second information display unit. The lower one light emitting member in the right column constitutes a third information display unit, and the lower one light emitting member in the left column constitutes a fourth information display unit.

  The first information display section and the second information display section are each composed of two light-emitting members, and a design is provided around each information display section so that the two light-emitting members are related. At a glance, it can be seen that one information display section is constituted by two light emitting members. Further, the third information display section and the fourth information display section are each constituted by one light emitting member, but the designs around these information display sections are designed to be understood to be independent. Thus, it can be seen at a glance that the information display section is constituted by one light emitting member. It should be noted that the design around the light emitting member has a sense of unity with the design of the entire gaming machine, so as not to impair the aesthetic appearance. Further, the design around the light emitting member is not formed by attaching a seal or the like, but is formed into a member constituting the guiding portion 616, so that labor and cost during manufacturing can be reduced.

  Further, in the lower right part of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a first special variable prize winning device (upper prize entrance) capable of converting between a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variable display game. 38 are provided. The first special fluctuation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing member 38c that can be opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls down to the front side, and determines whether or not the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game. The opening / closing member 38c is retracted from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) by closing the upper winning award, thereby opening the opening / closing member 38c to withdraw the game ball flowing down the game area 32 (advantageous for the player). State). That is, the first special variable prize winning device 38 has an upper prize winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening and closing member 38c driven by an upper prize winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 12) as a driving device, and has a special game state (based on a big hit). During the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state based on the small hit), the upper winning a prize opening is changed from a closed state to an open state, thereby facilitating the flow of the game ball into the upper prize winning opening. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is provided to the player. In addition, inside the upper winning opening (winning area), an upper winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 12) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the upper winning opening is disposed. Have been.

  In addition, below the first special fluctuation winning device 38, a second special fluctuation winning device (lower big winning opening) 39 which can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. Are arranged. The second special fluctuation winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing member 39c that can be opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side is inclined to the front side, and determines whether or not the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game. The opening / closing member 39c retracts from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) by closing the lower winning opening, thereby allowing the opening / closing member 39c to retreat and open the state (advantageous for the player) in which game balls flowing down the game area 32 can be received. State). That is, the second special variable winning device 39 has a lower big winning opening which is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 39c driven by a lower winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 12) as a driving device, and a special game state (based on a big hit). During the first special game state and the second special game state based on the small hit), the lower large winning opening is changed from a closed state to an open state, thereby facilitating the flow of the game ball into the lower large winning opening. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is provided to the player. In addition, inside the lower special winning opening (winning area), a lower special winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 12) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the lower special winning opening. Have been.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 32 in which the gaming ball flows down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is defined as a left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is defined as a right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and fires a game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the first start winning opening 36, the second start winning opening 97, and the general winning opening 35 of the winning device 90 are opened. The game ball is fired (so-called right-handed) to the right game area, so that the general figure starting gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device. It is possible to aim for a prize of 39.

  In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), a special figure 1 variable display game and a special figure 2 variable display game, which are special figure variable display games, and a collective display of various information are displayed. A display device 50 is provided.

  The collective display device 50 is, as shown in FIG. 3, a special figure 1 display for a special figure 1 change display game (first special figure change display section) configured by a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. 51 (D1) and a special figure 2 display (second special figure change display unit) 52 (D2) for the special figure 2 variable display game, and the start memory number notification of the special figure 1 variable display game composed of LED lamps. Special display 1 reservation display 54 (D11, D12), and special figure 2 reservation display 55 (D13, D14) for informing the start storage number of the special figure 2 variable display game.

  In addition, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the first special variable prize device 38 or the second special variable prize device 39), A first game state display unit 76 (D9) for notifying whether the current game is in a special game state during the normal power support, and a first game mode for notifying the hitting method corresponding to the game state among left hitting (normal hitting) and right hitting. A second game state display unit 77 (D8) serving as a notification unit is provided. Further, a third game state display unit (third game state display unit, probability state display unit) 78 (D17) for displaying that the probability state of the big hit is in the high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on is provided. Have been. In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a general-purpose display display 74 (D10, D18) for a general-purpose change display game, and a general-purpose display 75 (D15, D16) for notifying the number of start memories of the general-purpose change display game. Is provided.

  The special figure change display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the change display game, that is, while performing the decoration special figure change display game on the display device 41, The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The blink cycle is set to, for example, 100 ms. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, as shown in FIG. 3B, in addition to the center segment, the special figure 1 is provided on the lower right side of 7 seg. The eighth segment is also driven to blink to indicate that it is fluctuating, and is configured to be able to distinguish between Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. In addition, it may be displayed that a plurality of pieces of identification information (a special figure and a special symbol) for displaying the special figure change display game are being changed to indicate that the game is changing. When the result of the game is "missing", for example, the center segment (the 8th segment on the lower right side in addition to the special figure 1) is turned on as a result result of the game. In the case of "hit", a game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than a loss result mode as a hit result mode (special result mode).

  The special figure 1 hold display 54 displays the number of undigested balls (first start storage number = hold number) among the number of prize balls to the first start winning opening 36 which is a change start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. 3C, a plurality of LEDs are displayed by turning off and lighting (blinking). The special figure 2 reservation display 55 displays the number of undigested balls (second start storage) among the normal change prize winning device 37 and the second starting prize hole 97 serving as the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52. (Number = reserved number) is displayed by turning off and on (flashing) a plurality of LEDs as shown in FIG. The round display unit 60 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and is selected according to the result during the special game state as shown in FIG. 3D. The LED is turned on corresponding to the number of rounds. The round display section may be constituted by a 7-segment display.

  As shown in FIG. 3E, the first gaming state display unit 76 turns on the LED when the time saving state is set, and turns off the LED when the time saving state is not set. As shown in FIG. 3 (e), the second game state display unit 77 turns off the LED in the case of a left-handed game state (during normal striking), and turns off the LED in the case of right-handed game state (during right-handed game). In ()), the LED is turned on. As shown in FIG. 3E, the third gaming state display unit 78 turns on the LED when the power is turned on when the state is in the high probability state, and turns off the LED when the state is not the high probability state.

  In the variation display game on the variation display game 74, during the variation display of the variation display game, the variation symbol numbers shown in FIG. Indicates that it is changing. If the result is a hit, it is lit in a lighting mode according to the hit type to indicate that it is a hit, and if the result is a miss, the two LEDs are turned off to indicate a miss. . FIG. 3 (b) shows the number of undigested spheres (the number of stored normal figure starting = the number of reserved) among the number of passing balls of the general figure starting gate 34, which is a variation start condition of the general figure display 74. As shown in f), a plurality of LEDs are displayed by turning off and lighting (flashing).

  FIG. 4 shows a display mode on the special figure 1 display unit 51. During the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the center segment and the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment are blinked at a period of 100 ms. Then, the result is displayed by lighting in a mode corresponding to the result at the end of the fluctuation time. In some cases, a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, any one of the lighting modes is selected from these by a random number or the like.

  5 and 6 show display modes on the special figure 2 display 52. FIG. During the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game, the center segment is blinked at a period of 100 ms. Then, the result is displayed by lighting in a mode corresponding to the result at the end of the fluctuation time. In some cases, a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, any one of the lighting modes is selected from these by a random number or the like.

  FIG. 7 shows the probability of the big hit and the small hit, the big probability of the big hit when the big hit is won, and the small probability of the big hit when the small hit is won. The big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device (first special result), and the small hit is a special result without the operation of the condition device (second special result). The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is operated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is generated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the first special variable prize device 38 or the second special variable prize device 39 is set (the continuous actor operating device is activated). The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned flag is not set, for example, as in the case of winning a small hit lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. It is used as a term having various meanings.

  The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot (first special result), is common to Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, and the probabilities in the normal gaming state, which is a low-probability state, and the specific gaming state, which is a high-probability state, are respectively shown The probability is as shown in FIG. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special game state based on the big hit (first special game state) is set to the high probability state after the end, and when the predetermined number of times (here, 50 times) of the special figure change display game is executed, the game state changes to the low probability state. It is configured to be. Further, even if the high probability state is established based on the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not changed. Both are in a high probability state.

  The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is a probability as shown in FIG. This small hit probability is lower in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. In this way, in the high probability state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly executed, small hits frequently occur and the flow of the game is not interrupted. The small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and the small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit do not win twice.

  FIG. 7 (c) shows the jackpot types that can be selected in the special map 1 and the special map 2, the special variable prize winning device and the distribution probability that are opened for each jackpot type, and FIG. The small hit types that can be selected in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the special variable prize winning devices that are opened for each small hit type, the opening time, the number of open times, and the distribution probability are shown. In the 2R probability change D1 of the special figure 2, although it is hard to expect a ball, the number of the special figure change display games that can be executed in the high probability state is set to 50 again because of the big hit. In the special game state based on the 2R probability change D1, an effect is performed such that the number of games that can be executed in the high probability state is added.

  8 and 9 show the variation patterns of the special figure variation display game. FIG. 8 shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in which the types and the selectivity of the fluctuation patterns in the normal game state (low probability state) are defined. Note that a common variation pattern table is used in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.

  FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern table used when the result is incorrect and the number of start storages is one to three. The start storage number here is the total number of the first start storage number and the second start storage number. When the number of start memories is four or more, the selectivity of 3000 ms or 7000 ms without reach, which is a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time, is increased, and the selectivity of a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is reduced. It has been like that.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is set, some of the plurality of display results are already derived and displayed at a stage where they are not yet displayed. It refers to a display state in which the displayed result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure change display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure change display game changes a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right change display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the condition of the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same state). The state that has become the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the reach effects having different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving the special result mode include normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived (a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. In other words, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (in the case of a loss). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  FIG. 8B shows a fluctuation pattern table used when the result is a big hit (first special result). In the case of a big hit, a variation pattern is selected irrespective of the number of starting memories. In addition, in the case of a big hit, a reach state is always set. FIG. 8C shows a fluctuation pattern table used when the result is a small hit (second special result). The case of the small hit is the same as the case of the big hit, and the variation pattern is selected irrespective of the starting storage number. In addition, even in the case of a small hit, a reach state is ensured.

  FIG. 9 shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in which the types and the selectivity of the fluctuation patterns in the specific game state (high probability state) are defined. Note that a common variation pattern table is used in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.

  FIG. 9 (a) shows a variation pattern table used when the result is incorrect and the number of start storages is one to three. The start storage number here is the total number of the first start storage number and the second start storage number. When the number of startup memories is four or more, the selectivity of 1000 ms or 2000 ms without reach, which is a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time, is increased, and the selectivity of a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is reduced. It has been like that. FIGS. 9B and 9C show a variation pattern table used when the result is a big hit (first special result) and a variation pattern used when the result is a small hit (second special result). Shown the table. In the case of a big hit or a small hit, a variation pattern is selected irrespective of the number of starting memories.

  FIGS. 10 and 11 show a special game state (first special game state) based on a big hit (first special result) and a special game state (second special game state) based on a small hit (second special result). The opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device is shown. FIG. 10 shows the opening / closing pattern of the special variable winning device in the big hit type and the small hit type which can be selected in the special figure 1 variable display game, and FIG. The opening / closing pattern of the special variable prize winning device in the hit type is shown.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10, when the big hit type is a big hit of 16R probability change A1 in the special figure 1 variable display game, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened according to the special winning game opening / closing pattern 1 on the special figure 1. . In the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 in the special figure 1, after the fanfare period of 5000 ms, an opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R). Thereafter, a round in which an interval period of 2000 ms and an opening period of 29000 ms are set is repeated until 16 rounds are performed, and after the ending period of 11000 ms, the special game state ends.

  The time described in the interval period and the ending period in each of the opening and closing patterns shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 is a time obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time and the interval time or the ending time. For example, the interval period of the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 in the special figure 1 is 2000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 600 ms in the second half is the interval time. The ending period in the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 in Tokuzu 1 is 11000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 9600 ms in the second half is the ending time.

  The other opening / closing patterns have a fanfare period, an opening period, an interval period (including the remaining ball processing time) and an ending period (including the remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure, and the first special variable prize winning device accordingly. 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. Note that the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 5 on the special figure 2 in FIG. 11 is configured such that the opening period of 27200 ms and the closing time of 1500 ms in 5R are repeated 11 times, and then the opening is performed for 25000 ms. In addition, in any of the opening and closing patterns, when a predetermined number of winnings are made in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that time.

  In addition, for example, when the opening and closing patterns are the same from the start to the middle of the special game state, such as the special winning state opening and closing patterns 1 to 3 and the special winning state opening and closing patterns 2 and 3 of the special figure 2, the display is performed. The effect in the device 41 may be the same, and it may be difficult to determine the type of the big hit or the small hit. Further, during the special game state, suggestion or notification of information that enables the type of the big hit or the small hit may be performed.

  In addition, when the big hit is executed by any of the special winning opening opening / closing patterns 4 and 5 on the special figure 2, an effect of whether or not the long opening round is executed again after the end of the 4R (whether or not to continue) is made. It may be performed. In this case, for example, if the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 in the special figure 2 is, the short opening is performed from 5R to 16R which is the final round, and the big hit is finished. In the above-mentioned special figure 2, the short opening that is substantially the same as 5R to 16R of the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 is performed, then the long opening (25000 ms) is performed, and thereafter the same long opening as 4R is restarted. . Therefore, the time from 5R to 15R is used for the special winning opening and closing pattern 4 in the special figure 2 and the time between a plurality of short opening of the 5R is used for the special winning opening and closing pattern 5 in the special figure 2 is used. If it is a special winning game opening and closing pattern 4 on special figure 2, the result that long opening will not resume (big hit game is not continued) is notified if it is special winning game opening and closing pattern 4 By notifying the result that the long opening is to be resumed (the big hit game is continued), the expectation of the player may be increased.

  From the above, the special result includes the first special result (big hit) that can generate the first special game state and the second special game with a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special game state. The second special result (small hit) that can generate the state is included.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. In addition, when there is no distinction between the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. When a big hit (first special result) and a small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a hit (special result). Further, when there is no distinction between a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit and a second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit, it is simply referred to as a special game state.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from the launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by a turning member such as an obstacle nail or a windmill arranged at various places in the game area 32, and a general winning opening 35 forming a winning area, The first winning prize port 36 or the second starting prize port 97 of the prize device 90, the normal variable prize device 37, the first special variable prize device 38 or the second special variable prize device 39, or the bottom of the game area 32. And flows out of the game area 32. Then, game balls are placed in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 of the winning device 90, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39. When a prize is won, prize balls of a number corresponding to the type of the winning prize are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 12) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15. .

  The winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36 are detected as starting starting winning balls of the special figure 1 variable display game by a starting opening 1 switch 36a provided therein, and a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 ) Is stored as a limit. In the state where the special figure 1 variable display game can be started and the first starting storage number is 0, when a game ball wins in the first starting winning opening 36, the first starting memory is generated with the generation of the starting right. Is stored, the first start storage number is incremented by one, and the special figure 1 change display game is immediately started based on the first start storage, and the first start storage number is decremented by one at this time. . On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state is set. When a game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36, if the first start storage number is less than the upper limit number, the first start storage number is incremented by one and one first start storage is stored. . Then, in a state where the first start storage number has become 1 or more, the special figure 1 variable display game can be started (the previous special figure 1 variable display game ends or the special game state ends). The start memory number is decremented by one, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first start memory.

  The winning ball to the second starting winning port 97 is detected as a starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by a starting port 3 switch 97a provided inside. The winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as a starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by a startup port 2 switch 37a provided inside. In the state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, if there is a prize in the second starting winning opening 97 or the normal variable prize apparatus 37, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the prize. . In addition, a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or a special game state. When a game ball wins in the second start winning opening 97 or the normal variable winning device 37, if the second start storage number is less than the upper limit number, the second start storage number is added by 1 and one second start storage is obtained. Will be remembered. When the special figure 2 variable display game can be started (the previous special figure 2 variable display game ends or the special game state ends) in a state where the second start storage number is 1 or more, the second special figure 2 variable display game is started. The start memory number is decremented by one, and the special figure 2 variable display game is started based on the stored second start memory.

  At the time of detection of the starting winning ball, a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are extracted as start storage information, respectively, and the extracted random numbers are stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 12). In the special figure storage area (part of the RAM), a maximum number of times (for example, up to four times for each of the first start memory and the second start memory) is stored as the special figure start memory. The number of stored special figure start memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 of the collective display device 50, and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Displayed as start memory display.

  The game control device 100 performs a special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variable display apparatus) based on the first start memory, and performs a special figure 2 display based on the second start memory. A special figure 2 variable display game is performed at 52 (second variable display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time. In the event that the special figure change display game is ended, the one special figure change display game is ended as a result other than the special result (missing result).

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing the variable display in the display mode as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the predetermined result mode as shown in FIGS. Stop display. When the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. Jackpot and a first special game state (so-called big hit state). When the result of the special figure change display game is a small hit, a special result mode (small hit result mode) in which the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result. Becomes a small hit and a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 constitutes a first variable display means capable of displaying a first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on winning of a game ball into the first starting winning opening 36. Also, the special figure 2 display 52 can display the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 or the second starting winning opening 97. It forms a display means.

  Also, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numerals, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed on the display device (image display device) 41 in a variable manner. A decorative special figure change display game to be executed is executed. The decorative special figure variable display game includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. In addition, one set as the main display symbol is displayed larger than the other. Then, a fluctuation display is performed in accordance with the fluctuation of the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game, and a display corresponding to the result is performed along with derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game.

  That is, the display variation display game (variable display game) in which the display device 41 variably displays the decoration identification information corresponding to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). (A decoration special figure variation display game). Note that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one decorative special figure variable display game may be displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may not be provided in the gaming machine 10, and the special figure change display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

  When a big hit occurs and the special game state is set, the first special variable prize device 38 and the second special variable prize device 39 can be aimed rightward. After the end of the special game state based on the big hit, a specific game state which is a high probability state is set. In this specific game state, the probability of a winning result in the special figure change display game is a high probability state, which is a state higher than the normal probability state. In addition, regardless of which of the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game is in the high probability state based on the result mode of the special figure change display game, the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game do not change. Both of the variable display games are in the high probability state.

  Further, in the specific game state, the probability of the winning result of the normal figure variable display game (normal figure probability) is set to a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). State. Thereby, the opening time of the normal fluctuation prize device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is in the low probability state in the ordinary figure. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal game state.

  Further, in the time-saving state, the execution time of the general-floor display game (normal-figure fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, the general-figure stop time for displaying the result of the general-figure fluctuating display game is, for example, 600 msec, When the normal fluctuation winning game 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time of the first stop symbol (normal electric opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 msec × 1 time), The opening time of the second hit stop symbol (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 2 times), the opening time of the third hit symbol (normal time of opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 3 times).

  It should be noted that the execution time of the general-float display game, the general-figure stop time, the number of times of the general-figure release, and the general-figure open time are appropriately set so that the general-figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 are controlled to be in the time saving operation state. For example, in the time-saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (the general-purpose variation time) of the above-described general-purpose variation display game to be the second variation time shorter than the first variation time. (For example, 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Further, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the general stop time for displaying the result of the general change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is set to be shorter than the first stop time). 704 ms). Further, in the time-saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning game 37 is released as a result of the general fluctuation display game being hit, the release time (normal power release time) is changed to the second state in the normal state (low normal probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (number of times of opening of ordinary power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) with respect to one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, four times) to the second number of times of opening. Further, in the time reduction state, the probability of being a hit result of the general-floor variation display game (general-figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal-figure low-probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operation state. It is possible to set a probability (normally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

  In the time-saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is set to the open state by changing one or more of the general figure fluctuation time, the general figure stop time, the number of the general public opening, the general electric opening time, and the general probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states different from each other. Further, when a hit occurs, one of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. In addition, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated simultaneously, or only one of them can be generated.

FIG. 12 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. A CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110 with the input unit 120 and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator. The CPU 110 operates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock used as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to generate. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400, so that they can operate. Is done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC and 5 V DC from the 32 V DC voltage. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal and a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, You may comprise so that it may be provided on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on the power supply device 400 or a board different from the main board. Is provided, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the 32 V voltage generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects a power failure when the voltage drops to, for example, 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 are forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the game microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a fluctuation pattern table for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory. Further, the variation pattern table includes an outlier variation pattern table selected when the result is out of order, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like) is included.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output the game machines. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure change display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a change pattern (various types) in the special figure change display game. A random number generating circuit for generating a random number of a fluctuation pattern for determining a reach or non-reach variable display game (including an execution time of a variable display game), a hit random number for determining a hit of a normal map variable display game, and the like. And a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit to the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

  Further, the CPU 111A obtains any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111 </ b> A determines the game result (win (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure change display game and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure change display game as the current game state. State), the operating state of the normal fluctuation prize device 37 as the current gaming state (time saving operation state (normal power support state)), the number of stored start-ups, and the like. Select and acquire a fluctuation pattern table. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A constitutes a change distribution information obtaining means for obtaining any one change pattern table from among a plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, drives a payout motor of a payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, and displays a prize ball. Control for paying out is performed. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball loan request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball rental.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36 a in the first starting winning port 36, and a starting port 2 switch in the normal variable winning device 37. 37a, a starting port 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning port 97, a gate switch 34a in the ordinary figure starting gate 34, a winning port switch 35a, a first special variable winning device 38, a large winning port switch 38a, and a second special port. The lower winning opening switch 39a of the variable winning device 39 is connected to an out switch 98 for detecting all game balls (safe ball and out ball) fired in the game area 32 and finished the game, and supplied from these switches. Interface chip which receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V Proximity I / F) 121 is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so that the lead wires of the sensor and the proximity switch are short-circuited incorrectly, the sensor and the switch are disconnected from the connector, and the lead wire is cut off and floated. It is configured to detect an abnormal state as described above and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Note that among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the upper winning opening switch 38a, and the lower winning opening switch. The detection signal of 39 a is input to the second input port 123. Also, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62, an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected, and a detection signal of the out switch 98 are input to the third input port 124. Is done. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a fraudulent detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main substrate 100 to a not-shown test test device via the relay substrate 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a are input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal operation of the IC. Has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 to assert (change to an effective level) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and a first input port 122 described later.

  In addition, the input unit 120 includes a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not 200 is ready to accept a command), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating lack of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided for taking in a signal based on the input signal and supplying it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  The input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are temporarily input to the first input port 122 and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. The reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RESET can be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each of the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication route from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol information of the variable display game to the trial shooting test device of the notifying agency (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production sale product) installed in a game store. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal which cannot be supplied to the test shooting test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the board radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that it is not possible. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting a signal line of a detection signal of the switch without passing through the buffer, and the like. ing. The chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the trial shooting test apparatus.

  The output unit 130 has a solenoid (upper winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the first special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (lower winning opening) for opening the second special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting opening / closing data of a solenoid (generic solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and the solenoid 39b. The output unit 130 further includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  The output unit 130 has a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information (one jackpot signal, two jackpot signals, three jackpot signals, and four jackpot signals) to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided. The external information terminal plate 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132. That is, the game control device 100 forms an output unit that outputs information to the outside of the gaming machine.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives and outputs opening / closing data signals of the upper winning port solenoid 38b, the lower winning port solenoid 39b, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. A first driver (drive circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an on / off drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from a third output port 135, and an output from a fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 to be connected, and an external information terminal board that supplies an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. There is provided a fourth driver 138d for outputting to the 71.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so as to drive a solenoid operated at 32V. In addition, 12 V DC is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The dynamic driving method is achieved by supplying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line by the second driver 138b outputting 12V, and extracting a current from the cathode terminal via the segment line by the third driver 138c outputting the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the sequentially selected LEDs to light them. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12V DC in order to give a level of 12V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 450. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 450 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 like a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the starting port 3 in the second starting winning port 97 The switch 97a, the winning opening switch 35a, the upper winning opening switch 38a, the lower winning opening switch 39a, and the out switch 98 are provided with a coil for detecting magnetism. A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) for detecting a game ball is used. The glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 and the like include micro switches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), like the game microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing of the above, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held, and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that is a timekeeping unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. Note that a RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the production, and instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decorative lamp, And processing such as drive control of the solenoid and control of the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. Note that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of the interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 includes an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are converted into the production control command signal (production command). ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the information display device 630. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (eg, frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling the board effect device 44 (for example, a movable role or the like that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. In addition, even if a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame effect movable body control circuit for controlling the drive of the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the input and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for detecting the detection signal and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled thereby, and drives the motor and the solenoid. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to be. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling a VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), a sound source LSI 314, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, a lamp, a motor, and the like are output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In these control circuits, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning port 36, the random number value for the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is extracted. Then, the first start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The random number value for the big hit determination in the first start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit or a change pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed. Also, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and the starting port 3 switch 97a provided in the second starting winning port 97, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Is extracted and the second start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The random number value for the big hit determination in the second start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit or a change pattern of the special figure 2 change display game is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying a special figure change display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. That is, the game control device 100 performs the change display game based on the winning of the game balls flowing down the game region 32 into the start winning regions (the first starting winning opening 36, the ordinary variable winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97). The game control means for controlling the progress is provided.

  Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game on the display device 41 based on a control signal from the game control apparatus 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of setting an effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 forms an effect control unit that controls an effect relating to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, when the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and displays the special game mode. Performs processing to generate a state. In the process of generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111A opens the opening / closing member 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by using the upper special winning opening solenoid 38b, for example, so that the game ball can flow into the upper winning opening. Control. Alternatively, the opening and closing member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39 is opened by the lower special winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to allow the game balls to flow into the lower special winning opening.

  Then, until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins in the special winning opening or a predetermined opening time elapses after opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. Opening is defined as one round, and a control (cycle game) of repeating (repeating) this round a predetermined number of times is performed. That is, the game control device 100 forms a special winning opening opening / closing control unit that controls opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result mode is the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out of control on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. This specific game state is a high probability state and a time saving state (general power support state). In addition, only one of the high probability state and the time saving state may be generated, or neither of them may be generated (the low probability state and no time saving state).

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 18 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 14, first, a process for disabling an interrupt (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer which is a head address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs. Is performed (step X2). Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and an upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order. In step X4, the leading 00h is set. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as the main control means is executed. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, and the like). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a target of validity determination) of the RAM that is not a target of validity determination (calculation of a checksum). Thus, when calculating the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that the initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the elapse of the standby time, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the elapse of the standby time, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, the operation can be detected immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on can be detected. Can be prevented.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) are performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via a port and a data bus to set the number of times of checking (for example, two times) (step X8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (Step X9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step X10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step X9). If the power failure monitoring signal has been ON for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits for the power to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately cope with a failure at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so backup processing and the like are performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the load on control can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and whether the timer value is 0 is determined. Is determined (step X12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or an EEPROM is permitted (step X13). ), And outputs the OFF data to all output ports (sets no output) (step X14).

  Next, a serial port (a port mounted in the gaming microcomputer 111 in advance and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X15), and read first. It is determined whether the initialization switch has been turned on based on the state of the first input port 122 (step X16).

  If the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17). If (Step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (Step X18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19), and the calculated checksum and power failure (Step X20). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), the process shifts to step X21 in FIG. 15 to perform the process in the case of normal recovery from the power failure.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X23 in FIG. 15 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make

  In step X21 of FIG. 15, an initial value at the time of restoration from power failure is saved in an area to be initialized (step X21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. Note that the busy signal flag area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. The state is undefined. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is changed to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

  After that, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X22). Go to X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X22, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. As the screen designation command, if the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in the normal processing to be described later, that is, if the special figure change display game is not being executed or is not in the special game state, the customer is waiting for the customer. Send the command for the waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command for the recovery screen. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step X16, X17, X18, X20 to step X23, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step X23), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X24), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step X25). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in an area to be initialized (step X26). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X27), and the process proceeds to step X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X27, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (display a customer waiting demo screen, and light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) , A plurality of commands are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted.

  In step X28, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step X28, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X29). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines By exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to make any setting.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various initial value random numbers corresponding thereto (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining a hit symbol of a special figure) After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) (step X30), interruption is permitted (step X31). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step X32) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” which is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are used as a timer interrupt process which is a processing unit of the program. The “low-speed counter” is updated based on the CTC output having the same cycle (a different CTC (CTC2) from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process). In addition, the so-called "initial value changing method" in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round is adopted for the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random-type update in which all values in the range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step X32, the number of times (for example, two) to check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step X33). It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step X34). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X34; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step X32). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed. By permitting an interrupt (step X31) before the initial value random number updating process (step X32), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt is executed. Is kept waiting by the initial value random number update process, thereby avoiding pressure on the interrupt process.

  Note that the initial value random number updating process in step X32 includes a method of performing an initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid the execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed and only the main process is performed, there is no problem if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update process, so that the main process It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step X33 (step X35). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal is not continued for the number of checks (step X35; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step X34). If the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (step X35; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, interrupt interruption is temporarily prohibited (step X36). A process of outputting the off data to the output port (step X37) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X38), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X39). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is cut off (step X40) and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step X41), a process of prohibiting access to the RWM (step X42). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. Thus, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power-off, it is possible to determine whether or not the information stored in the RWM before the power-off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means ), The main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control apparatus when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time.

  In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) If the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured such that the RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit Initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C, and reads the operation state of the initialization means before the start of the standby time.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) permits the access to the RAM 111C after the elapse of the standby time.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 16 shows the checksum calculation process (steps X19 and X40) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculation address (step X51), the number of repetitions is set (step X52), and "0" is set as the calculation value (step X53). . The number of bytes of the RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the contents of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step X54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step X55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step X56), and the checksum is updated. It is determined whether the calculation has been completed (step X57). If the calculation has not been completed (step X57: N), the process returns to step X54 to repeat the above processing. If the calculation has been completed (step X57: Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 17 shows an initial value random number update process (step X32) in the above-described main process. In this initial value random number updating process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X61), the small hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step X62), and the initial value random number updating process ends. Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the big hit stop symbol in the special figure change display game, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” is a special figure change display game. This is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines a small hit stop symbol. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, the interrupt routine is started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 18 is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step X101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing for transferring a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main processing) to the RWM. Next, an upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and fetching of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step X103) are performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step X104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (upper winning opening solenoid 38b, lower winning opening solenoid 39b) and the like is performed. When a signal for stopping firing is output in step X5 in the main processing, a signal for permitting firing is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal is set to a state where it can be set to a permitted state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the payout control device. At this time, no processing of the signal or the like is performed. The firing permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (the firing permission signal) indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both are permitted to fire, the game ball is configured to be ready to fire.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (Step X105) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (Step X105), a random number update process 1 (Step X106), and a random number update process 2 (Step X107) are performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a normal signal is input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the winning opening switch 35a, the upper winning opening switch 38a, and the lower winning opening switch 39a. A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108) for monitoring and for monitoring errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) is performed.

  Next, a start-up switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring winning of the start-up 1 switch 36a, the start-up 2 switch 37a, and the start-up 3 switch 37a. In the starting port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (eg, a jackpot random number) are extracted based on the winning of game balls into the first starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37, and the second starting winning port 97. Then, special figure 1 game processing (step X110) for performing processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 game processing (step X111) for performing processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game are performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112) for driving a segment LED provided on the gaming machine 10 to display a special figure change display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, and a magnetic sensor 61 Illegal magnet monitoring processing (step X113) for checking the detection signal from the controller to determine whether there is an abnormality, and illegal panel radio processing for checking the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality. A monitoring process (step X114) is performed. Further, an external information editing process (step X115) for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer is performed, and a base is calculated based on the number of game balls detected by the out switch 98 and the number of payouts based on winning in a winning area. A state display edit output process for performing a process of calculating a value or the like is performed (step X116), and the timer interrupt process ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt return. Automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step X103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 19, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step X121). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step X122), and the state of the read input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step X122). X123).

Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the address of the second input port 123 is prepared (step X124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step X125).
After preparing unused bit data (step X126), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X127), and switch reading processing (step X128) is performed.

Thereafter, the address of the input port 3, that is, the address of the third input port 124 is prepared (step X129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step X130).
Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X131), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X132), switch read processing (step X133) is performed, and the input processing is completed.

  In the present embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value to a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set to an RWM or another memory. Further, as information on the unused bit data and the inverted bit data, information prepared corresponding to each input port is used.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps X128 and X133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step X141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the unused bit is cleared (step X142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is set. Is saved (step X144). Thereafter, it waits until a delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading elapses (step X145).

  After the elapse of the delay time (0.1 ms), the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read for the second time (step X146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the unused bit is cleared (step X147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step X149). After that, in the first and second readings, a fixed bit pattern in which the same bit is set to 1 and the different bit is set to 0 is created (step X150), and the logical product of the fixed bit pattern and the port input state 2 is obtained. It is set as a fixed bit (step X151).

  Next, in the first and second readings, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state is set to 0 and the different bit is set to 1 (step X152). The product is taken and set as a previously held bit (step X153). This makes it possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to switch chattering or the like has been removed. Then, the currently determined bit and the previously held bit are combined, saved as the currently determined state (step X154), exclusive ORed between the previous and current determined states, saved as the rising edge (step X155), The switch reading process ends.

  When a timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once for each interrupt processing and the signal is changed by comparing with the result of the previous read. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been performed. However, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that a correct determination may not be made. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, the above-described problem can be avoided.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step X104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 12) for outputting the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step X161). Next, the data output to the solenoid output port 134 for outputting the data of the upper winning opening solenoid 38b and the lower winning opening solenoid 39b is combined and output (step X162).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X163), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the digit counter value is obtained (step X163). X164), and synthesizes the acquired information with the external information data (step X165). The combined data is output to the digit output port 136 and the external information output port 137 (step X166). Then, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step X167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (step X168).

  Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and combined (step X169), the combined data is combined with the output data of the emission permission (step X170), and the combined data is used for external information output. Output to port 137 (step X171). Next, data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 for outputting a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step X172). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step X173).

  Next, data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step X174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step X175). Then, data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step X176), and the output processing ends. That is, the game control device 100 forms an output unit that outputs information to the outside of the gaming machine.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step X105) in the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the payout command transmission processing, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize to which a payout command has not been transmitted yet. Winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). Winning data corresponding to a prize ball in which the main prize ball signal is not generated in the used area is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout control device 200 outputs a payout prize ball signal every time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By comparing these two signals, it is possible to monitor an illegal payout.

  In each of these winning number counter areas, a winning number counter area is provided for each number of prize balls set for each winning port (for example, three prize balls, ten prize balls, and fourteen prize balls). In addition, the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. Note that the winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted irrespective of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the transmission of the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is set in the winning number counter area to be checked. It is determined whether there is a count number that is not. If there is no count number (step X181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X182), and it is determined whether the check of the count numbers of all the winning number counter areas has been completed. (Step X183). If it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step X183; Y), the process proceeds to step X192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (Step X183; N), the process returns to Step X181 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in step X181 that there is a count number (step X181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (−1) (step X184), and the target winning number counter is counted. The number of payouts corresponding to the area is obtained (step X185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added to make a new prize ball remaining number (step X186), and saved in the prize ball remaining area (step X187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that is less than a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, a predetermined number 10 serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the addition result (step X188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189). When the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step X189; N), the process proceeds to step X192. In this case, since the result of the subtraction is not saved in the remaining prize ball area, the value before the subtraction is stored in the remaining prize ball area. If the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189; Y), the value of the main winning ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (step X190), and the subtraction result is saved in the remaining winning ball area (step X191). , And return to step X188.

  As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls during a big hit or the like is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed at the same time as the payout of the game balls, and the accurate It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of award balls cannot be counted.

  In step X192, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (step X193). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step X193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. In other words, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control. The payout busy signal flag is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal. One of a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately and an undefined state in which the state is undefined is set.

  Note that the undefined state is set by clearing the busy signal flag area in, for example, processing at power-on. The indefinite state is that the idle state or the busy state is set based on that the state of the payout busy signal is maintained for a predetermined period to indicate that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be performed. To eliminate. In other words, when a power failure occurs and the vehicle returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. Instead of transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control device 200 in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 being continuously output over a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 reliably receives the prize ball command and immediately recognizes that the payout process is possible, and then transmits the prize ball command, and performs the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command. Can be prevented from being inadvertent.

  If the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. Here, it is determined that the apparatus is busy even when the state is undefined. As described above, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command is not performed. Prevention and reduce the burden of control.

  If the payout busy signal flag is not busy (step X194; N), it is checked whether or not the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step X195). In the process of checking whether or not the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step X195), “0” is set in the winning number counter area to be checked among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for the number of winning balls. It is determined whether there is a count number that is not.

  If there is no count in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X196), and the addresses of all the winning number counter areas are updated. It is determined whether the check of the count number has been completed (step X197). If it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step X197; Y), the payout command transmission processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step X197; N), the process returns to step X195 and repeats the above processing.

  If it is determined in step X195 that there is a count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step X195). X198), and obtains a payout command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 (step X199). Then, the acquired command is written into the payout serial transmission buffer (step X200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step X201), and the payout command transmission processing is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal output from the payout control unit (payout control device 200) indicating whether the payout control unit can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. Prize ball command transmission means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means when the prize ball command is issued.

  As described above, since the game control device 100 performs the control of transmitting the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, the prize is provided only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. A ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winning that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up on the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function for performing the payout.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2000-327759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on this data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a backup function, which leads to an increase in cost. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without having a function for backing up in the payout control device 200.

  Further, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can output the prize ball. The timing can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed comprehensively, and the prize areas provided in the game area 32 (the first start prize port 36, the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37, the second start prize port 97, the general prize port 35, A game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on a game ball winning to the first special fluctuation prize device 38 and the second special fluctuation prize device 39), and a prize ball transmitted from the game control means. A payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of the game balls based on the command, wherein the payout control means output from the payout control means can start the payout control. Based on a state signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means, when a power outage occurs and the power is restored from the power outage, the payout control means can start the payout control. Show that there is Even if the state signal is output, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means is continuously output for a predetermined period. In response to this, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In the game area 32, a prize area having a different number of prize balls (a first start prize port 36, a normal variable prize apparatus 37, a second start prize port 97, a general prize port 35, a first special variable prize apparatus 38, a second special prize apparatus 38) A plurality of variable prize winning devices 39) are provided, and the game control means (game control device 100) includes, for each prize ball number, a prize ball command counter capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls has not been transmitted. (Game control device 100), the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and when there is an untransmitted prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is paid out by the payout control means ( To the payout control device 200), and the status signal determines whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control by determining whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command. Is to be done before the identification of .

  In addition, the game control is performed comprehensively, and a predetermined prize area (the first start prize port 36, the normal variable prize port 37, the second start prize port 97, the general prize port 35, the first special variable prize port 38, (2) The game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the special fluctuation prize winning device 39), and the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. A payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control, wherein the game control means outputs a state signal output from the payout control means indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when it indicates that control can be started, and a payout with a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area. Number of prize balls decided External information output means (game control device 100) for outputting a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information about the game to the outside of the gaming machine, wherein the external information output means is in a state outputted from the payout control means. This means that the signal outputs the prize ball signal regardless of whether the payout control means can start the payout control.

  The prize-ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) immediately transmits the prize-ball command when the power failure occurs and the vehicle returns from the power failure, even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. Is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information related to a prize ball command, and a prize capable of storing information related to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) includes a predetermined prize area (first start prize port 36, ordinary variable prize apparatus 37, second start prize port). 97, a prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the general prize port 35, the first special variable prize device 38, and the second special variable prize device 39), and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. Is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200) when the prize ball command is played, and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) sets one prize in a predetermined prize area as a unit. Of the prize Information can be stored and updated when a game ball enters a predetermined prize area, and updated in correspondence with transmission to a prize ball command to the payout control means, thereby not transmitting award balls. The number of commands can be stored, and the external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area, and each time the accumulated value reaches the predetermined number, a prize ball signal Is output to the outside of the gaming machine, the prize ball signal counter can store the information of the prize in units of one prize in the predetermined prize area, the game ball to the predetermined prize area By updating at the time of winning, and by updating in accordance with the cumulative processing of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not yet been subjected to the cumulative processing.

[Random number update processing 1]
FIG. 23 shows a random number update process 1 (step X106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). The random number updating process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number which are the targets of the initial value random number updating process. In the random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X221).

  If the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224). If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; Y), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X222), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is corresponded. It is set in a register (start value setting register) holding a start value of a random number counter (random number area) to be executed (step X223). Then, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).

  When the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended. If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; Y), the small hit symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X225), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step X226), and the random number update processing 1 ends.

[Random number update processing 2]
FIG. 24 shows a random number update process 2 (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are a 1-byte random number (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and a 2-byte random number (variable pattern random number 1) as the variable pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for the upper byte and the lower byte at different interrupts. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (the random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to:

  In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step X231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step X232). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is obtained from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step X233). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether the random number has completed one cycle.

  Subsequently, for example, the value of the M1 counter provided in the game microcomputer in the present embodiment is loaded (step X234). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to random numbers. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is obtained and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step X235). Note that the mask value is different in the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 Is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. When updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although four bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is merely an example and is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the random number area to be updated (random number counter) is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; Y), the value remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as an added value (hereinafter, this is referred to as The value is set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to the masked value, and the lower byte is set to “0” (step X237), and the process proceeds to step X239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as an added value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step X236). X238), and proceeds to step X239. The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value may become “0”, and if “0” is added later, the value does not change from the value before the addition. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239). If the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239; Y), a value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step X240). , The process proceeds to step X242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step X239; N), “0” is set as the upper byte of the random number value, and the value (1 byte) of the random number area to be updated is set as the lower byte of the random number value. ) Is set (step X241), and the process proceeds to step X242.

  In step X242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step X237 or X238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step X233 (step X242). X243). If the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; N), the new random number value is saved in a lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step X245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as a new new random value (step X244), and this value is set to 1 It is saved in a random number area lower than the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step X245).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246). If the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step X246; N), the random number update process 2 ends. If it is a 2-byte random number (step X246; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again) is saved in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step X247). ), And terminates the random number update processing 2.

  As described above, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Accordingly, the CPU 111A determines, among the various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls into the first starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37, and the second starting winning port 97, the variation mode of the special figure variable display game ( (Variation pattern) for determining a variation pattern random number.

[Winner switch / Status monitoring process]
FIG. 25 shows the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one upper winning opening switch 38a in the upper winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step X301). In spite of the fact that the special winning opening is not open, the special winning opening is monitored for any illegal winning and the illegal / winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning (Step X302).

  The winning opening monitoring table (fraud monitoring table) includes a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of a fraud winning number area, a fraud winning error. The notification command, the upper limit of the number of illegal winnings (the number of occurrences determined to be incorrect), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the information of the notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. The winning opening switch table defines information on the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), monitoring switch bits, the address of the winning number counter area 1, and the address of the winning number counter area 2. As these fraud monitoring tables and winning tables, those corresponding to the respective switches to be monitored are prepared.

  After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower winning opening switch 39a in the lower winning opening (the second special variable winning device 39) is prepared (step X303), and whether there is an illegal winning is monitored. An illegal & winning monitoring process (step X304) for detecting a normal winning is executed. Next, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the public telephone is prepared (step X305), and fraud & winning monitoring processing for monitoring for an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning. (Step X306) is executed.

  Then, a winning port monitoring table for the winning port switches (here, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, and the general winning port 35) is prepared (Step X307). The winning number counter is updated (step X308). Next, the status scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the switches and signals whose status is to be monitored and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (step X309). This state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, a gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting a state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X311) for determining whether an error has occurred or not is performed.

  By referencing the value of the state scan counter to the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, monitoring of the state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch, etc. If the value is set and the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state based on the shot-out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the abnormal payout status signal is set.

  Next, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting a state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter is prepared (step X312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X313) for determining whether an error has occurred or not is performed.

  When the value of the state scan counter is 0, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, and the state scan is performed. When the value of the counter is 1, monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (step X314). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X314; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step X315), and the gaming machine state check for determining whether an error has occurred or not is performed. The processing (step X316) is performed.

  By referencing the value of the state scan counter to the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, if the value of the state scan counter is 0, it is possible to monitor the state based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of a switch connector or the like. Is set. Note that the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, the payout control device 200 performs a payout busy signal check process (step X317) for setting a busy signal flag based on a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control can be started, and ends the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. I do. Note that the processing of steps X315 to X317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed once every four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing of steps X315 to X317 is performed every 16 ms.

[Illegal & winning surveillance processing]
FIG. 26 shows the fraudulent & winning monitoring process (steps X302, X304, X306) in the winning port switch / status monitoring process described above. This fraudulent and winning monitoring process is performed by starting each of the two special winning prize switch 38a of the first special variable prize device 38, the lower special prize opening switch 39a of the second special variable prize winning device 39, and the normal variable prize device 37. This is a process performed on the two switches 37a. Regarding these, since it is easy to forcibly open the opening / closing member and insert a game ball to pay out a prize ball, the fraud is monitored in addition to the detection of the winning.

  In this fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be monitored for error is checked (step X321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning switch for error monitoring is the upper winning switch 38a, and the winning monitor for error monitoring is used. When the switch is the lower special winning opening switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special game state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. When the winning port switch for error monitoring is the starting port 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is being executed based on the normal situation.

  If it is during the fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (Step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (Step X332). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step X324), and the added illegal winning number is added to the monitoring target fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5) (step X325).

  The determination number is set to five, for example, when a winning port in an open state is converted to a closed state, a game ball is caught in the opening / closing member of the winning port, and the game ball passes a valid period of a winning port switch. This is because when a prize is awarded or when noise is added to a signal, it is determined that the signal is not illegal.

  If the number does not exceed the determination number (step X325; N), a winning port monitoring table of the target winning port switch is prepared (step X330). If the number exceeds the determined number (step X325; Y), the number of unauthorized winnings is kept at the determined number of unauthorized occurrences (step X326), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target unauthorized winning notification timer area (step X326). X327). Next, a target fraudulent command is prepared (step X328), a fraud prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step X329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), a winning port monitoring table of the target winning port switch is prepared (step X330), and a winning number counter updating process for setting a winning ball (step X331) is performed. . Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332), and it is determined whether the update of the notification timer is permitted (step X333). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step X333; N), the fraudulent and winning monitoring process is terminated. When the update of the notification timer is permitted (step X333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X334). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning-monitoring switch to be monitored for error is one upper winning switch 38a, and is permitted when the winning-switch for error monitoring is the other upper winning switch 38a. Not done. This prevents the notification timer from being updated twice as frequently with respect to the fraudulent notification regarding the first special variable winning device 38, thereby preventing the time from being increased by half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . If the winning port switch to be monitored for error is the lower winning port switch 39a or the starting port 2 switch 37a, the updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335). If the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, a target unauthorized release command is prepared (step X336), and an unauthorized winning release release flag is set as the unauthorized flag. Prepare (step X337). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).

  When the value of the notification timer has become 0 (step X338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer has become 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( (Step X339), and compares the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (Step X340). If the value of the notification timer is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud and winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is set as a target. The value is compared with the value in the invalid flag area (step X340).

  If the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step X341), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step X342), the fraudulent and winning monitoring process ends. With the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an unauthorized winning error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is released, and the start and end of the error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
FIG. 27 shows the winning number counter updating process (steps X308 and X331) in the winning port switch / state monitoring process and the fraud & winning monitoring process described above. In the winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is obtained from the winning opening switch table of the winning opening monitoring table (step X351), and input to the target winning opening switch (exactly, a change in the input). ) Is determined (step X352).

  If there is no input (step X352: N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X368), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X369). If there is an input (step X352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X354), and it is determined whether or not an overflow occurs (step X354). Step X355). If no overflow has occurred (step X355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step X356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357). ). If an overflow has occurred (step X355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357).

  After loading the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (step X357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X358), and it is determined whether or not overflow occurs (step X359). If an overflow has occurred (step X359; Y), the flow shifts to step X361. If no overflow has occurred (Step X359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (Step X360), and the routine goes to Step X361.

  In step X361, the value of the total winning number counter area for counting the total number of gaming balls winning each winning opening is loaded (step X361), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X362), and it is determined whether or not overflow occurs. (Step X363). If no overflow has occurred (step X363; N), the updated value is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X364). As a result, the game balls that have won each winning opening are counted, and the counting result is held. That is, the game control device 100 uses the winning detection sensors (starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, starting opening 3 switch 97a, upper winning opening switch 38a, lower winning opening switch 39a, winning opening switch 35a). It forms a total winning number counter for counting the number of detections. Thereafter, a difference calculation process for calculating a difference necessary for the determination of the out-number error is performed (step X365), and the flow proceeds to step X368.

  Although details of the difference calculation process and the error based on the difference will be described later, the number of detected game balls at each winning opening is determined by an out switch 98 that detects all game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and have finished playing. This is a process of calculating the number exceeding the number of detected game balls as a difference. If this difference exceeds a predetermined number, an out-number error occurs.

  On the other hand, if an overflow has occurred (Step X363; Y), the value of the difference counter area is saved in the total winning number counter area (Step X366), and 0 is saved in the out counter area (Step X367), and Step X368 is performed. Move to The difference counter area is an area for storing the above-described difference value, and the out counter area is an area for storing the number of game balls detected by the out switch 98. When the value of the total winning number counter area overflows, the values of the total winning number counter area and the out counter area are set as described above. Note that the value of the difference counter area is maintained. As a result, there is no inconvenience in detecting the out-number error.

  Thereafter, the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X368), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X369). If the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step X369; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X352). When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X369; Y), the winning number counter updating process is ended. Through the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 and the total winning number counter area are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Direction command setting processing]
FIG. 28 shows an effect command setting process (step X342) in the fraudulent and winning monitoring process described above. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X371), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X372).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X372; Y), the process returns to step X371. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X372; N), the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written in the serial transmission buffer for effect (step X373), and the status of the serial transmission buffer is read (step X374). It is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X375).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X375; Y), the process returns to step X374. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X375; N), the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step X376), and the effect command setting process ends.

  As described above, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the load on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the command analysis can be made difficult. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced, and the number of data lines can be reduced. Further, in the effect control device 300, it is not necessary to take in the command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 29 shows the gaming machine state check processing (steps X311, X313, X316) in the above described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. In this gaming machine state check processing, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is obtained (step X451), and it is determined whether a signal to be monitored is on (step X452).

  In the status monitoring table, information corresponding to the status scan counter is defined. This information includes, for example, the lower address of the head address of the state monitoring area, the lower address of the port input state area of the switch control area in which the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bit of the target signal, the signal ON judgment data, status off command (in the case of an error, an error notification end command is performed), status on command (in the case of an error, an error notification start command is performed), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer Contains the comparison value.

  If the target signal is not on (step X452: N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step X453), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step X454). Then, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X455), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459). The case where the target signal is not ON (step X452: N) is a state in which an error-related signal indicates that there is no error (normal), and a signal from the touch switch indicates that the touch is not performed. is there.

  On the other hand, when the target signal is ON (step X452: Y), a state ON flag is prepared as a state flag (step X456), and a target state ON command is acquired and prepared (step X457). Then, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X458), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459). The case where the target signal is on (step X452: Y) is a state indicating that an error-related signal indicates an error (abnormal or illegal), and a signal from the touch switch indicates that a touch has been made. It is a state which shows.

  If the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step X459; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step X459; N), that is, if the signal state has changed, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step X460). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step X461), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462), and it is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X462). Step X463).

  If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463; N), the gaming machine state check processing ends. When the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463: Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by −1 and kept at the value of the comparison value −1 (step X464), and the preparation is completed. The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step X465).

  When the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step X465; Y), the gaming machine state check processing ends. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step X465; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step X466), and the effect command setting processing is performed. (Step X467) to end the gaming machine state check processing. Thereby, the state-off command prepared in step X454 or the state-on command prepared in X457 is transmitted to effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 30 shows the payout busy signal check process (step X317) in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process described above. In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step X471). Note that the payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is not on (step X471; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X472), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X473). If the payout busy signal is ON (step X471; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X474), and an ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X475). .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal state area is the same as the state of the current signal, that is, whether or not there has been a change in on / off (step X476). If the value is the same (step X476; Y), The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479). If they are not the same (step X476; N), the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area (step X477), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step X478), and the busy signal monitoring timer is reset. +1 is updated (step X479).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is larger than the previously set ON fixed monitoring timer comparison value or OFF fixed monitoring timer comparison value, that is, whether the signal fixed time (for example, 32 ms) has been reached (step). X480). If the signal determination time has not been reached (step X480; N), the payout busy signal check process ends. If the signal determination time has been reached (step X480; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by −1, and the previously set ON determination monitoring timer comparison value or OFF determination monitoring timer comparison value of −1 is subtracted. (Step X481), the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (Step X482), and the payout busy signal check processing ends.

  By this processing, a busy signal flag is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately after the state of the payout busy signal changes, and the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues for the signal determination time, and And so on.

  Further, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and becomes an undefined state until one of the signal states continues for the signal determination time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the vehicle recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. In response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 being continuously output over a predetermined period, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 reliably receives the prize ball command and immediately recognizes that the payout process is possible, and then transmits the prize ball command, and performs the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command. Can be prevented from being inadvertent.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the start-up switch monitoring process (step X109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the starting port switch monitoring processing, first, a starting port 1 (first starting winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X485), and a hard random number acquisition processing is performed (step X486). Then, it is determined whether or not there is start port winning information set when the jackpot random number is obtained based on the winning in the first starting winning port 36 in the hard random number obtaining process (step X487).

  If the start opening winning information is not set based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (step X487; N), the process proceeds to step X494. In this case, the information on no start-up winning is set. On the other hand, when the information on the start opening winning is set based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (step X487; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in the high probability (step X488). If the probability is high (step X488; Y), the process proceeds to step X490. If it is not during the high probability (step X488; N), it is determined whether or not a big hit is being made (during a special game state based on the big hit) (step X489).

  If it is not a big hit (step X489; N), the process proceeds to step X490. If a big hit is in progress (step X489; Y), the flow shifts to step X492. In step X490, a right strike instruction notification command is prepared (step X490), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X491). Thereafter, a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 1 is prepared (step X492), and the common process for the special figure starting port switch is performed (step X493).

  Next, a winning monitoring table is prepared for the starting port 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step X494), a hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X495), and a big hit random number is obtained based on the winning in the normal fluctuation winning device 37. It is determined whether or not there is start-up winning information set in this case (step X496).

  If the start-up winning information is not set based on the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 (step X496; N), the process proceeds to step X501. In this case, the information on no start-up winning is set. On the other hand, if the start-up winning information is set based on the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 (step X496; Y), the normal electric accessory (normal variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, It is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is operated to be in an open state in which a game ball can be won (step X497). When the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step X497; Y), Move to step X499. On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step X497; N), it is determined whether or not the illegal operation of the ordinary electric power is occurring (step X498).

  In step X498, it is determined that the fraud has occurred if the number of frauds won in the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud determination number (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball cannot be won in a closed state, and a game ball can be won only in an open state. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. If the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  If it is determined in step X498 that unauthorized fraud has occurred (step X498; Y), the process proceeds to step X501. Further, when it is determined that the irregularity of the ordinary telephone is not occurring (step X498; N), a table for setting information of suspension by the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (step X499), and the special figure start is performed. After performing the mouth switch common process (step X500), the process shifts to step X501.

  Next, a winning monitoring table is prepared for the starting opening 3 (second starting winning opening 97) (step X501), and a hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X502). Then, it is determined whether or not there is start-port winning information set when the jackpot random number is obtained based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 97 in the hard random number obtaining process (step X503).

  If the start-up winning information is not set based on the winning in the second startup winning opening 97 (step X503; N), the start-up switch monitoring process ends. In this case, the information on no start-up winning is set. On the other hand, when the information regarding the presence of the starting opening winning is set based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 97 (step X503; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in a high probability (step X504). If the probability is high (step X504; Y), the process proceeds to step X508. If it is not during the high probability (step X504; N), it is determined whether it is during the big hit (during the special game state based on the big hit) (step X505).

  If it is not during the big hit (step X505; N), the process proceeds to step X506. If a big hit is in progress (step X505; Y), the flow shifts to step X508. In step X506, a right strike instruction notification command is prepared (step X506), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X507). After that, a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 3 is prepared (step X508), the common process for the special figure starting port switch is performed (step X509), and the starting port switch monitoring processing is ended.

  In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the right-handing instruction notification command transmitted in step X490 or X506, the right-handing instruction notification for instructing the player to make a right-handing by display, voice, or the like is performed. . When the player is in the high probability state, the player is in a time saving state, so that a right-handed player who can win the normal variable prize device 37 is more advantageous for the player. A right-handed player who can win the variable winning device 39 is more advantageous for the player. Therefore, when a winning is detected in the high probability state in the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 which are not to be won unless left-handed, a right-handed instruction is notified. In the special game state based on the small hit, the possibility of winning is low, so that the right strike notification is not performed, but may be performed. In the case of the special game state based on the 2R probability change jackpot, the possibility of winning is low, so that the right strike notification may not be performed. Also, when the ending is being performed in the special game state, the right strike notification may not be performed.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
FIG. 32 shows a hard random number acquisition process (steps X486, X495, X502) in the above-described start-up switch monitoring process. In this hard random number acquisition processing, first, information on no start-up winning is set (step X511), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (step X512).

  If there is no input to the target switch (step X512; N), the hard random number acquisition processing ends. If there is an input to the target switch (step X512; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step X513), and it is determined whether the target random number latch register has latch data (step X514).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; N), the hard random number acquisition processing ends. When there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; Y), the extracted big hit random number is loaded and prepared in the target hard random number latch register (step X515). Then, the start-up winning information is set (step X516), and the hard random number acquisition process ends.

[Tokuzu start switch common processing]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common processing (steps X493, X500, X509) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. The special process start port switch common process is a process that is performed in common for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are input.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the special figure starting port switch common processing, first, among the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a and the starting port 3 switch 97a, the number of winnings to the monitored starting port switch is described. The starting port signal output count, which is the number of times information is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10, is loaded (step X521), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522). Is determined (step X523).

  If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output number area of the RWM (step X524), and the process proceeds to step X525. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output count area. When the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by the +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows, so that no saving is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitored starter switch among the starter 1 switch 36a, the starter 2 switch 37a, and the starter 3 switch 97a is less than the upper limit value. (Step X525). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step X525; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 reservations or the number of special figure 2 reservations) is updated by +1 ( (Step X526), prepares a start port switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number (step X527), performs an effect command setting process (step X528), and sets the target startup port prize flag. Is saved (step X529).

  Subsequently, an address of a random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations is calculated (step X530), and the jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process of steps X486, X495, and X502 is calculated by RWM. (Step X531). Next, a jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X533).

  Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers (in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step X534). Then, a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X535), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X536). Thereafter, the special figure reservation information determination processing (step X537), which is the pre-reading processing, is performed, and the special figure starting port switch common processing ends.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the first winning prize port 36, the second starting prize winning port 97, and the normal prize winning area of the variable winning device 37. A start storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as start memory which is an execution right of the variable display game. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on winning of game balls into the first start winning opening 36, which is the start opening of the special figure 1, with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Various random numbers, which are stored as starting memories and are extracted based on the winning of game balls into the second starting winning opening 97, which is the starting opening of the special map 2, or the normal variable winning device 37, are set to a predetermined number as an upper limit. Store as memory.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure hold information determination processing (step X537) in the above-described special figure starting port switch common processing. The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead processing for determining the result related information corresponding to the special figure start storage before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the special figure start storage. In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is a big hit based on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value (step X543). If the result of the determination is a big hit (step X544; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546). A pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is a small hit based on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value (step X547). ). If the result of the determination is a small hit (step X548; Y), stop symbol information for the small hit is set (step X549), and a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the result of the determination is not a small hit (step X548; N), stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step X550), and a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  After preparing a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551), effect command setting processing is performed (step X552). Next, special figure information setting processing (step X553) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and special figure fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. (Step X554).

  Then, a pre-reading variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step X555), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step X556), the special figure suspension information judgment processing ends. Note that the special figure information setting processing in step X553 and the special figure change pattern setting processing in step X554 are performed by the special figure 1 change start processing of the special figure 1 normal processing and the special figure 2 change start processing of the special figure 2 normal processing. This is the same as the process executed at the start of the variable display game.

  With the above processing, the look-ahead stop symbol command including the result of the special figure change display game based on the special figure start memory, and the look-ahead change pattern command including the information of the change pattern in the special figure change display game based on the special figure start memory Is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (pre-read result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit or the type of a fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the special figure start memory is stored in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding special figure start memory. The effect can be notified to the effect control device 300 before the start timing, and particularly by changing the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41, etc., before the start timing of the special figure change display game. It becomes possible to notify the result-related information to the player.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage device (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judge whether or not). In addition, the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning where the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
FIG. 35 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X110) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 1 game process, the control of the entire processing relating to the special figure 1 variable display game and the setting of the display of the special figure 1 are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, first, during the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2, that is, during the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. Is determined (step Y101).

  If the special figure 2 is not in the big hit / small hit (step Y101; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, −1 is updated (step Y103). ). If the big hit / small hit in the special map 2 is being performed (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y103.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is played by the upper special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Performs processing to monitor detection. In the special figure 1 game process, a special winning state switch monitoring process is performed for a special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in a special figure 2 game process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the flow shifts to step Y119 to perform the subsequent processing. If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already elapsed, the processing branches to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. Is set in a register (step Y105). Then, by using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is obtained (step Y106), and a subroutine call based on the special figure 1 game processing number is performed (step Y107).

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is “0” in step Y107, the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure 1 A special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y108) for setting information necessary for performing the processing during fluctuation in FIG. 1 is performed. If the special figure 1 game processing number is “1” in step Y107, the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 1 display is performed. One fluctuation process (step Y109) is performed.

  In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the big hit type and the setting of each big hit type A special figure 1 displaying process (step Y110) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is “3” in step Y107, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the update of the opening number, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening processing, and the like are performed. The processing of the fanfare / interval to be performed (step Y111) is performed. In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the last round, an interval command is set, and if it is the last round, an ending command is set. A special winning opening opening process (step Y112) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is “5” in step Y107, if the big hit round is the last round, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening or the special figure 1 A special winning port remaining ball processing (step Y113) for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed. If the special figure 1 game processing number is “6” in step Y107, the special figure 1 big hit end processing (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y108) I do.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "7" in step Y107, the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hit are performed. During the small hit fanfare (step Y115), information necessary for the setting is set. If the special figure 1 game processing number is "8" in step Y107, a small hitting middle processing (step Y116) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "9" in step Y107, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hitting middle processing or the small hit end A small hit remaining sphere process (step Y117) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed. If the special figure 1 game processing number is “10” in step Y107, special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y118) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 ordinary processing is performed.

  After that, a special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and a pattern change control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. FIG. 1 The game processing ends. The special figure 1 game process performs a series of execution control for the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special figure 2 game processing]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure 2 game process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 2 game process, the control of the entire processing relating to the special figure 2 variable display game and the setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 game processing for the special figure 2.

  In this special figure 2 game process, first, during the special hit state of the special figure 1 during the big hit / small hit, that is, during the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit Is determined (step Y131). If it is not during the big hit / small hit in the special figure 1 (step Y131; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y132). Step Y133). If the big hit / small hit in the special map 1 is being performed (step Y131; Y), the process shifts to step Y133.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is played by the upper special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Performs processing to monitor detection. In the special figure 2 game processing, a special winning state switch monitoring process is performed for a special game state that is executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-described special figure 1 game process.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y152, and the subsequent processing is performed. If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already elapsed, the processing branches to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number. Is set in the register (step Y136). Then, by using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is obtained (step Y137), and a subroutine call based on the special figure 2 game processing number is performed (step Y138).

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “0” in step Y138, the start of the change of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the special figure 2 variable display game, the setting of the effect, and the special setting are performed. FIG. 2 A special process 2 (step Y139) for setting information necessary for performing the process during fluctuation is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “1” in step Y138, the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process is performed. The process during two fluctuations (step Y140) is performed.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit and the setting of each big hit type The special figure 2 displaying process (step Y141) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “3” in step Y138, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, and the like are performed. The processing of the fanfare / interval to be performed (step Y142) is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “4” in step Y138, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, while an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round. A special winning opening opening process (step Y143) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the last round, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening or the special figure 2 A special winning opening remaining ball process (step Y144) for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end process is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “6” in step Y138, the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 ordinary processing (step Y139) I do.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “7” in step Y138, the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hit are performed. In the small hit fanfare processing (step Y146) for setting the information necessary for the operation is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is "8" in step Y138, a small hitting middle processing (step Y147) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is "9" in step Y138, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hitting processing or the processing for ending the small hitting A small hit remaining sphere process (step Y148) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “10” in step Y138, the special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

  After that, a special figure 2 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y152), and a symbol change control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. FIG. 2 ends the game processing. The special figure 2 game process performs a series of execution control for the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-described special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 game processing for the special figure 2. In the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. The corresponding processes will be described in parallel.

[Grand prize opening switch monitoring process]
FIG. 37 shows the special winning opening switch monitoring processing (steps Y102 and Y132) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the upper special winning opening (the first special variable winning device 38) is being opened (step Y161). If the winning opening is open (step Y161; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. If the upper winning hole is not open (step Y161; N), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball processing of the upper winning hole is being processed (step Y162). Note that the remaining ball processing in this determination includes both the big winning port remaining ball processing based on the big hit and the small hit remaining ball processing based on the small hit.

  If the remaining ball of the upper winning a prize port is being processed (step Y162; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. In addition, when the remaining ball processing of the upper special winning opening is not being performed (step Y162; N), it is determined whether the lower special winning opening (the second special variable winning device 39) is being opened (step Y163). If the lower winning opening is not being opened (step Y163; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the lower winning a prize port is being opened (step Y163; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower prize winning switch (step Y164).

  The opening in steps Y161 and Y163 refers to the opening in the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the first special result (big hit), and the special gaming state based on the second special result (small hitting). And during the opening in the second special game state. In the determinations in steps Y161 to Y163, the determination may be made with reference to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 game processing number, or a flag indicating whether or not each state is set may be set. The determination may be made based on this flag.

  If there is no input to the lower winning opening switch (step Y164; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If there is an input to the lower winning opening switch (step Y164; Y), 1 is set to a winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the big winning opening added in the current big winning opening switch monitoring process. (Step Y165), and the process proceeds to Step Y175.

  On the other hand, in the step Y166 where the upper winning a prize mouth is being opened (step Y161; Y) or when the remaining sphere of the upper winning prize is being processed (step Y162; Y), 0 is set to the winning counter. It is set (step Y166). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper winning a prize port switch 1 (one upper prize port switch 38a) (step Y167). If there is no input (step Y167; N), the process proceeds to step Y171.

  If there is an input to the upper winning opening switch 1 (step Y167; Y), a winning opening count command is prepared (step Y168), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y169). In the case of the first special variable winning device 38, a special winning opening count command is transmitted in order to perform an effect by winning. Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y170), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper winning port switch 2 (the other upper winning switch 38a) (step Y171).

  When there is no input to the upper winning a prize port switch 2 (step Y171; N), the process proceeds to step Y175. If there is an input to the upper winning opening switch 2 (step Y171; Y), a winning opening count command is prepared (step Y172), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y173). Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y174), and the flow shifts to step Y175.

  Thereafter, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step Y175; Y), when the winning prize opening remaining ball is being processed (step Y176; Y), or when the small hitting remaining ball is being processed (step Y177; Y). If so, the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step Y175; N), the winning prize mouth remaining ball is not being processed (step Y176; N), and the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (step Y177; N), the winning is achieved. The value of the counter is added to the special winning opening count (step Y178), and it is determined whether the special winning opening count is equal to or more than an upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (step Y179).

  If the special winning opening count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (here, 9) (step Y179; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the special winning opening count is equal to or larger than the upper limit (step Y179; Y), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step Y180), and the target special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (Step Y181). Then, it is determined whether or not the opening is being performed in the first special game state, which is the special game state based on the big hit, during opening at the big hit (step Y182).

  If it is not open with a big hit (step Y182; N), that is, if it is open with a small hit, the big winning port switch monitoring process ends. If the big win is being opened (step Y182; Y), the big win opening control end value is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (step Y183), and the big win switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round is completed.

  It is also possible to transmit a special winning opening count command to the effect control device 300 when there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (step Y164; Y). In addition, when there is a remaining ball processing for the lower winning award, a large winning opening count command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 even when an input is made to the lower winning a switch during the remaining ball processing. You may do it.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y108) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In the special map 1 ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the change of the special map 1 can be started (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 can start to change in this determination means that the state is not from the stop of the change of the special figure 2 change display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, to the end of the special game state. It should be noted that, while the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game is in a state where the fluctuation cannot be started, in this case, the special figure 1 ordinary processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

  If the special figure 1 cannot be changed (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 ordinary processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 ordinary processing ends. In addition, when the variation of the special figure 1 can be started (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handing instruction has been notified, that is, whether the left-handing instruction notification flag has been set (step Y202). If the left-handing instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-turn instruction has not been notified (step Y202; N), a left-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y204). Thereafter, a left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (step Y206). The left-turn instruction notification flag is cleared when the last special figure variation display game performed in the specific game state, which is a high probability state, is ended, and thereby the normal game state, which is a low probability state, is set. Is performed, the left-handed instruction is notified.

  If the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y217. If the number of reserved special figure 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y208). Thereafter, a special figure 1 change start process for setting information on the special figure 1 change display game is performed (step Y209), and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step Y210). Then, effect command setting processing is performed (step Y211). At the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 reservation number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 reservation is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared.

  Next, the special figure status change area is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y212). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure change display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed, and the special figure status 4 is a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates a second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 change display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

  Next, it is determined whether the state is in the high probability state (step Y213). If the state is in the high probability state (step Y213; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If it is not in the high-probability state (step Y213; N), it is determined whether it is in the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y214). The term “high probability final fluctuation” means that the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) from the end of the first special game state (including the stop time), and the lottery is performed in the high probability state. Is running in the last special figure change display game.

  If it is during the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y214; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If it is not during the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y214; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y215). That is, when the special figure 1 change display game is started in the low probability state, the special figure 1 change check flag is set. Thereafter, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting processing is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 ordinary processing ends.

[Tokuzu 2 usual processing]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 2 ordinary processing (step Y139) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. In the special map 2 usual processing, first, it is determined whether the change of the special map 2 can be started (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start to change in this determination means that the state is not between the stop of the change of the special figure 1 change display game which is a big hit or a small hit and the end of the special game state. It should be noted that, while the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game is in a state in which the fluctuation cannot be started, in this case, the special figure 2 is not in the normal processing. Here, this need not be determined.

  If the special figure 2 cannot be changed (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 usual processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 normal processing ends. If the special figure 2 can be started to change (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 2 is 0 (step Y222).

  If the number of reserved special figure 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y224). Thereafter, a special figure 2 change start process for setting information relating to the special figure 2 change display game is performed (step Y225), and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is prepared (step Y226). Then, effect command setting processing is performed (step Y227). At the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command (step Y226), the special figure 2 reservation number based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not subtracted, and the current special figure 2 reservation is not performed. A reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared.

  Next, the state of the special figure 2 being changed is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y228). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status. Then, it is determined whether the state is in the high probability state (step Y229). If the state is in the high probability state (step Y229; Y), the process proceeds to step Y232. If it is not in the high-probability state (step Y229; N), it is determined whether it is in the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y230). The term “high probability final fluctuation” means that the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) from the end of the first special game state (including the stop time), and the lottery is performed in the high probability state. Is running in the last special figure change display game.

  If it is during the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y230; Y), the process proceeds to step Y232. If it is not during the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y230; N), a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y231). That is, when the special figure 2 change display game is started in the low probability state, the special figure 2 change check flag is set. After that, a special figure 2 changing processing transition setting processing is performed (step Y232), and the special figure 2 ordinary processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y233). Then, if the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y233; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is changing (step Y234). If the special figure 1 is not fluctuating (step Y234; N), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y235). If it has not been disclosed (step Y235; N), it is in the customer waiting state. Performs processing related to settings. If the number of reserved special figure 1 is not 0 (step Y233; N), if special figure 1 is changing (step Y234; Y), or if a customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y235; Y), Then, the process proceeds to Step Y239.

  In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step Y236), and a customer waiting demonstration command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y237). A command setting process is performed (step Y238), and the process proceeds to step Y239. By making the customer waiting demonstration command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

  Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 without the backup function loses the information of the game state, so that it is impossible to perform an appropriate effect, but By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, from the reception of this command, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state, and to transmit the probability information command based on the change of the game state. It becomes possible to return to the effect according to the gaming state earlier than waiting.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously, and the probability state may be changed by the processing for the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, a change start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure change display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). This makes it possible for the effect control device 300 to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state.

  In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. Thus, it is possible to return to the effect corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the change of the game state. It should be noted that the customer waiting demonstration command and the change start probability information command may include other information for enabling the effect to be returned to the effect according to the gaming state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 40 shows the special figure 1 change start processing (step Y209) in the above-described special figure 1 ordinary processing. This special figure 1 change start processing is processing performed at the start of the special figure 1 change display game. First, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and the outlier information is obtained as the result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Then, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting big hit information or small hit information is performed (step Y242).

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed. An information setting process (step Y244) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game are set (step Y244). Step Y245).

  After that, a special figure change pattern setting process (step Y246) for setting a change pattern that is a change mode in the special figure 1 change display game is performed, and a change start information setting process for setting change start information of the special figure 1 change display game is performed. (Step Y247) is performed. By these processes, the result and the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed are determined. Thereafter, a high-probability variation count update process for managing a period in which the state is set to the high-probability state is performed (step Y248), and the special figure 1 variation start process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 41 shows the special figure 2 change start processing (step Y225) in the above-described special figure 2 usual processing. This special figure 2 change start processing is processing performed at the start of the special figure 2 change display game. First, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and the deviation information is obtained as the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. A big hit flag 2 setting process for setting big hit information or small hit information is performed (step Y262).

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed. An information setting process (step Y264) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are set (step Y264). Step Y265).

  After that, a special figure change pattern setting process (step Y266) for setting a change pattern that is a change mode in the special figure 2 change display game is performed, and a change start information setting process for setting change start information of the special figure 2 change display game is performed. (Step Y267) is performed. By these processes, the result and the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed are determined. Thereafter, a high-probability-variation-number update process for managing the period of the high-probability state is performed (step Y268), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process ends.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 42 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) in the above-described special figure 1 change start process. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, a jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (step Y273), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to zero. The storage number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 1).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 which is the result of the big hit determination of the running special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y275). If the big hit is a big hit (step Y275; Y), the process proceeds to step Y279. I do. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y276) is a jackpot (step Y277; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the missed information was saved in step Y272 (step Y278). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), it is determined whether or not the obtained big hit random number value is a small hit according to whether or not it is a small hit. Is performed (step Y279).

  If the result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten on the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step Y271, and the save is performed. Then (step Y281), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not a small hit (step Y280; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the large hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 43 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the above-described special figure 2 change start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the RWM (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area is cleared to zero. Note that the reserved number 1 area is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the special figure 2 is the earliest).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 as a result of the big hit determination of the running special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (step Y295). If the big hit is a big hit (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. I do. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the missed information was saved in step Y292 (step Y298). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is not a jackpot (step Y297; N), whether the acquired jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value indicates whether the jackpot is a small jackpot or not. Is performed (step Y299).

  If the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten on the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information has been saved in step Y291, and the save is performed. Then (step Y301), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. In this case, the miss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination process]
FIG. 44 shows the big hit determination process (steps Y276 and Y296) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In the big hit determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value that is a lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than an upper limit determination value that is an upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. Is determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is smaller than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a result of the determination indicates that the player has lost the lottery of the big hit. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether the state is the high probability state (step Y313).

  If it is in the high-probability state (step Y313; Y), an upper-limit determination value during high-probability is set (step Y314), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper-limit determination value (step Y316). ). If the state is not the high probability state (step Y313; N), an upper limit judgment value during the low probability is set (step Y315), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316). .

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, when the big hit is not a big hit, a loss is set as a judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing ends. When the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; N), that is, when it is a big hit, a big hit is set as a judgment result (step Y318), and the big hit judgment processing ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
FIG. 45 shows the small hit determination processing (steps Y279 and Y299) in the above described big hit flag 1 setting processing and big hit flag 2 setting processing. In the small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). Note that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit determination value that is the lower limit value of the small hit determination value and equal to or less than the upper limit determination value that is the upper limit value of the small hit determination value. In some cases, a small hit is determined. Also, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, an outlier is set as the judgment result (step Y326), and the small hit judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a result of the determination indicates that the lottery has been lost. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set, that is, whether the determination is for the special figure 1 variable display game. (Step Y322).

  If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), the small hit upper limit judgment value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), and the value of the target big hit random number is set to the small hit upper limit judgment value. It is determined whether the value is greater than (step Y325). If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y322; N), that is, if the determination is for the special figure 2 variable display game, the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324). It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325).

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y326), and the small hit judgment processing ends. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step Y327), and the small hit judgment processing ends. I do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 46 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (step Y243) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (the number of reservations 1) ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (step Y332). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y334). The big hit type is selected by this process. Note that the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because the result may be forcibly changed to the result.

  After that, a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (step Y337), and the special winning opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained. The special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area is saved (step Y338). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, an ornament special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and if it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y340). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this processing. Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and a decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol retreat area (step Y344), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stopped. The pattern is saved in the symbol pattern area (step Y345), and a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure 1 command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y347), and effect command setting processing (step Y348) is performed. The decorative special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350). The symbol random number storage area for one small hit (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 47 illustrates the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (step Y263) in the above-described special figure 2 change start processing. The special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is the same as the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process for the special symbol 2. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361). If it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (the number of reservations 1) ), And loads a jackpot symbol random number from (for step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol save area (step Y364). The big hit type is selected by this process. The reason why the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area is when a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because the result may be forcibly changed to the result.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), and a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (step Y367), and the special winning opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained. The special drawing 2 large winning opening opening information area is saved (step Y368). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, an ornament special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369). If it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y370). Next, a special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol save area (step Y372). The small hit type is selected by this processing. After that, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373), and a decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y374), and the non-stop symbol pattern is stopped. The pattern is saved in the symbol pattern area (step Y375), and a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure 2 command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y377), and effect command setting processing (step Y378) is performed. This decorative special figure 2 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y380). The 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure information setting processing]
FIG. 48 shows the special figure information setting processing (steps Y244 and Y264) in the special figure 1 change start processing and the special figure 2 change start processing described above. This special figure information setting processing is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. When the special figure 1 is performed in the special figure 1 change start processing, the special figure 1 is set as a target special figure and the special figure 2 change start processing is performed. If so, the processing is performed with the special figure 2 as the target special figure.

  In this special map information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a high probability is in progress (step Y401). If it is not during the high probability (step Y401; N), a low probability variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y402), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the target special figure are acquired. Then, it is determined whether the target special figure is a big hit, that is, whether the stop symbol pattern of the target special figure is a big hit stop symbol pattern (step Y404).

  If the target special map is a big hit (step Y404; Y), the flow shifts to step Y412. If the target special figure is not a big hit (step Y404; N), it is determined whether the target special figure is a small hit, that is, whether the stop symbol pattern of the target special figure is a small hit stop symbol pattern (step Y404). Y405). If the target special map is not a small hit (step Y405; N), that is, if it is out of place, the value is converted by adding the special figure reservation number to the first half offset data (step Y407), and the process proceeds to step Y412. I do. If the target special map is a small hit (step Y405; Y), the flow shifts to step Y412.

  On the other hand, when the high probability is in progress (step Y401; Y), a high probability variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y408), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop pattern pattern of the target special figure are set. Is acquired (step Y409), and the routine goes to step Y412.

  Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y412), and the second half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y413), and the special figure information setting is performed. The process ends.

  In other words, in the special figure change display game in the normal gaming state, in the case of a loss, the change pattern is determined in consideration of the number of special figure reservations only in the first half fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern is determined without consideration. In the special figure change display game in the specific game state, the change pattern is determined without considering the number of special figure reservations.

[Special figure fluctuation pattern setting processing]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure fluctuation pattern setting processing (steps Y246 and Y266) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The change pattern is a first half change pattern that is a change mode from the start of the special figure change display game to the reach state, and a second half change pattern that is a change mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure change display game. The first half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  In this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, a fluctuation group selection address table is set (step Y451), and the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is obtained and prepared (step Y452). The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the target special figure (step Y453).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is out, that is, whether the stop symbol pattern is a non-stop symbol pattern (step Y454). If the target special figure is out of step (step Y454; Y), the 2-byte sorting process is performed. Performed (Step Y455), and then proceed to Step Y457. If the target special map is not out of position (step Y454; N), a sorting process is performed (step Y456), and the flow shifts to step Y457. When the result is a big hit or a small hit, the sorting value is 1 byte, but when the result is out of order, the sorting value is 2 bytes to enable various effects.

  Then, the address of the second-half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the target special figure. To prepare (step Y458). Then, a distribution process (step Y459) is performed, a second-half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and saved in the second-half variation number area (step Y460). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

  Next, a first half variation group table is set (step Y461), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the second variation number determined as the variation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, an address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the target special figure. (Step Y464).

  Thereafter, a distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained and saved in the first variation number area (step Y467), and the special figure variation pattern setting process is ended. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure fluctuation display game to be started from now is set.

[2-byte distribution processing]
FIG. 50 shows a 2-byte distribution process (step Y455) in the above-described special figure variation pattern setting process. The two-byte distribution process is a process for selecting a second-half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second-half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In the two-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the head data of the prepared second half fluctuation group table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (step Y501). Here, the second half variation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half variation pattern group, but defines the second half variation pattern group in which the second half variation pattern is “no reach”. In the fluctuation group table, since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top.

  If the first data in the second half fluctuation group table is a code without distribution (step Y502; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution processing ends. I do. On the other hand, if the data at the head of the second half variable group table is not a code without distribution (step Y502; N), one distribution value specified first in the second half variable group table is obtained (step Y503).

  Next, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value obtained in step Y373 from the loaded random value (the value of the variation pattern random number 1) (step Y504), and the calculated new random value is calculated. Is smaller than “0” (step Y505). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (step Y505; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y506), the processing shifts to step Y503, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do. That is, in step Y503, a distribution value specified next in the fluctuation group selection table is acquired, and then in step Y505, the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random number as a new random value, and a new random number is determined. A numerical value is calculated (step Y504). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y505).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step Y505 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y505; Y). As a result, any one of the second half variation selection tables is selected from at least one second half variation selection table specified in the second half variation group table. If it is determined in step Y505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the distribution result (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution processing is performed. To end.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 51 shows the above-described special figure variation pattern setting processing and the distribution processing (steps Y456, Y459, Y465) in the special figure variation pattern setting processing. The distribution process selects the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 or the first half variation selection table ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the first data of the prepared second-half variation selection table (selection table) or the first-half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”). (Step Y511). Here, the second-half change selection table and the first-half change selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second-half fluctuation pattern and the first-half fluctuation pattern, as in the second-half fluctuation group table. In the case of a selection table having no assignment, the assignment value “0”, that is, a code without assignment is specified at the top.

  If the first data in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step Y512; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y517), and the distribution is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, if the data at the head of the second-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (step Y512; N), one distribution value specified first in the second-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table Is obtained (step Y513).

  Next, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y513 from the loaded random number value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 or the fluctuation pattern random number 3) (step Y514). It is determined whether the new random number value obtained is smaller than “0” (step Y515). If the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step Y515; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y516), the processing shifts to step Y513, and Perform processing.

  That is, in step Y513, after obtaining the distribution value specified next in the second-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table, in step Y515, the determined random number value is subtracted as a new random value and the distribution value is subtracted. Then, a new random value is calculated (step Y514). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y515).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step Y515 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y515; Y). As a result, any one of the second half variation number and the first half variation number is selected from at least one second half variation pattern and the first half variation pattern defined in the second half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table. If it is determined in step Y515 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y515; Y), the address is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y517), and the distribution process ends. I do.

[Change start information setting process]
FIG. 52 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y247 and Y267) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. In this change start information setting process, first, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y551), and if the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y551; Y), The random number storage areas (for the number of hold 1) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step Y552). If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y551; N), that is, if the information of the special figure 2 is being set, the random number storage areas of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the special figure 2 are cleared (step Y551). Y553).

  Next, a first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y554), and a first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y555). Further, a second half variation time value table is set (step Y556), and a second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is acquired (step Y557). Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step Y558), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y559).

  Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y564), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step Y565), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y566). ). Next, the number of reserved special-figure figures is updated by -1 (step Y568), the contents of the random number storage area of the target special-figure are shifted (step Y569), and the vacant area after the shift is cleared (step Y570). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure change display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 can determine the result and the variation mode information of the variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game) based on the start memory stored in the start storage means. Make a decision. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined change pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special figure change display game. Set the details of the effect in the decoration special figure change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure change display game includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information regarding the number of storages to be started (the number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information regarding a stop symbol, and a change in the special figure change display game. A fluctuation command including information on a pattern is exemplified. By transmitting the decoration special figure command before the change command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

  That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a first variable display game execution control unit capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game). In addition, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control relating to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game process. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a second variable display game execution control means capable of controlling execution of a second variable display game (a special figure 2 variable display game). Also, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control on the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game process.

  Further, the game control device 100 can transmit the result and the change mode information of the first variable display game and the result and the change mode information of the second variable display game to the effect control unit (the effect control device 300) as control information. Form a transmission means. In addition, the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game in response to the start of the variation display game, and when the measurement time has elapsed the variation time. It forms a measuring means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update processing]
FIG. 53 shows the high probability change frequency update processing (steps Y248 and Y268) in the special figure 1 change start processing and the special figure 2 change start processing described above. In this high probability change frequency update processing, first, it is determined whether the high probability change is being performed (step Y581), and if not high probability (step Y581; N), the high probability change number update processing is terminated. If the high probability is in the high probability state (step Y581; Y), the high probability variation count for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high probability state is updated by -1 (step Y582). Is determined to be 0 (step Y583).

  If the number of times of high probability change is not 0 (step Y583; N), that is, if the high probability state continues, the process of updating the number of times of high probability change ends. When the number of times of high probability change is 0 (step Y583; Y), that is, when ending the high probability state, a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). . Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 change time reduction state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 change time reduction state signal is set to OFF.

  Further, the low-probability state and the number of no time saving are saved in the game state display number area (step Y586), and the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y587). Then, the high-probability final fluctuation flag corresponding to the symbol to start the fluctuation is set (step Y588), the low-figure low-probability flag is saved in the general-figure game mode flag area (step Y589), and the high-probability fluctuation frequency update processing is performed. finish. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a specific game state generating means for generating a specific game state over a period from the end of the special game state to the execution of the predetermined number of variable display games. Although the high probability state and the time saving state are set as the specific game state, a state in which only one of them is generated may be used.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the high probability state is set until the predetermined number of special figure change display games are executed after the end of the special game state, but the special figure 1 change display game and the special figure 2 change display are set. Since the game can be executed at the same time, the high-probability variation count updating process for managing the number of high-probability states is performed at the start of the special figure variation display game. If the gaming machine does not execute the special-figure variable display game during execution of the special-figure variable display game as in the related art, the probability state is set by the end of the predetermined number of special-figure variable display games. There is no problem if you change to the low probability state. However, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be simultaneously executed as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability state is set to the low probability at the end of the predetermined number of special figure variable display games. If the state is changed, the determination is made in the high probability state even to the other special figure change display game started during the execution of the one special figure change display game, and the high probability change is performed for a predetermined number of times or more. The game can be executed in the state. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, one special figure variable display game, which is the predetermined number of times, is executed in a high probability state. After the determination, it is necessary to keep the low probability state before the start of the other special figure change display game, and here, immediately after finishing the processing at the start of one special figure change display game which is the predetermined number of times, It is possible to change to a low probability state.

  As described above, since the high probability variation count updating process is performed at the start of the special figure variation display game, for the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery in the high probability state is performed, the variation of the special figure variation display game is performed. During the display, it is already in the low probability state. Therefore, if other processing is performed with reference to the actual probability state during the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game, the processing may be performed as a low probability state, which may cause inconvenience. is there. Therefore, the special-figure variation display game is set with a high-probability final variation flag so that the special-figure variation display game can be treated as a game being executed in a high-probability state. The high-probability final fluctuation flag is information that can determine whether the last special-figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery in the high-probability state is performed is the special-figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special-figure 2 fluctuation display game. Contains.

[Special figure 1 change processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 54 shows the special figure 1 change processing transition setting processing (step Y216) in the special figure 1 ordinary processing. In this special figure 1 change processing transition setting processing, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y601), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y602).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y603), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the initial value of the blink control timer (timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is stored in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (step Y605). For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y606). Further, an initial value is set in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 changing processing transition setting processing ends.

  The initial value to be set in the symbol number area during the fluctuating special figure 1 is 0, whereby the fluctuating display starts from a state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special figure 2 processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 55 shows the special figure 2 changing processing transition setting processing (step Y230) in the special figure 2 ordinary processing. In the special figure 2 changing processing transition setting processing, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y611), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y612).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y613), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the initial value of the blink control timer (timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is stored in the special figure 2 blink control timer area (step Y615). For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y616). Further, an initial value is set in the special figure 2 changing symbol number area (step Y617), and the special figure 2 changing processing transition setting processing ends.

  The initial value to be set in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 2 is 0, so that the variable display starts from a state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

  It should be noted that when the variable display is started on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it starts from a state where all the segments are turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any of the result modes, and if there is a segment that is not used in any of the result modes, the variable display is started at least from a state in which the segment is turned on. You may do it. Further, the variable display may be started from a state where the same one segment is always turned on every time. In addition, the lighting mode when the change is started in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be the same or different.

[Processing during special figure 1 fluctuation]
FIG. 56 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the above-described special figure 1 game process. In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times of design confirmation output is updated by +1 (step Y621), and a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y622). Performed (Step Y623).

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y625). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the stop may be forcibly stopped before the change time set at the start of the change. Therefore, when the change is stopped, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the final variation has a high probability (step Y626). If the special figure 1 change display game is a high probability final change, the high probability final change flag of the special figure 1 is set. If the final variation is not a high-probability final variation (step Y626; N), a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y627), and the process proceeds to step Y629. If it is a high-probability final change (step Y626; Y), a display time at the time of the high-probability final change is set (step Y628), and the process proceeds to step Y629. The display time (stop time) of the special figure 1 variable display game set here is 600 ms for a loss, 2000 ms for a big hit, and 600 ms for a small hit if the final change is not high probability. Display time is set. In the case of the high probability final fluctuation, a display time of 2000 ms is set regardless of the result.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of place, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of place (step Y629). If the special figure 1 is out of place (step Y629; Y), the flow shifts to step Y644. If the special figure 1 is not out of the way (step Y629; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y630). Whether or not the special figure 2 change display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  If the special figure 2 change display game is not being executed (step Y630; Y), the process proceeds to step Y640. If the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y630; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 displaying process is in progress (step Y631). That is, in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped on the result of the loss based on the special result of the special figure 1 variable display game. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already completed the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not been completed, the forced stop is also performed.

  When the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y631; Y), the flow shifts to step Y633. If the special figure 2 is not being displayed (step Y631; N), the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y632), and the display time of the special figure 1 set above as the display time of the special figure 2 is set. A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y633). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of the special figure 2 as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. The display time is reset even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already being displayed, and a new display time is started.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y634), commands are loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area to prepare them (step Y635), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y636). ). After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y638), and processing transition setting processing 2 during special figure 2 display is performed (step Y639).

  Then, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y640), and it is a special figure 1 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y641). If it is a special figure 1 small hit (step Y641; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. If the special figure 1 is not a small hit (step Y641; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y642). ), The information is loaded from the special winning opening opening information area and saved in the winning opening opening information area (step Y643).

  Thereafter, information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area, saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y644), and the processing shift setting processing 1 during the special figure 1 display is performed (step Y645). The displaying process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation processing]
FIG. 57 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the above-described special figure 2 game process. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and the effect command setting processing is performed. Perform (step Y653).

  Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y655). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the final variation has a high probability (step Y656). If the special figure 2 change display game is a high probability final change, the high probability final change flag of the special figure 2 is set.

  If the final variation is not a high-probability final variation (step Y656; N), a display time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is set (step Y657), and the flow shifts to step Y659. If it is a high-probability final change (step Y656; Y), a display time at the high-probability final change is set (step Y658), and the flow shifts to step Y659. Note that the display time (stop time) of the special figure 2 change display game set here is 600 ms in the case of a loss, 2000 ms in the case of a big hit, and 600 ms in the case of a small hit if it is not a high probability final change. Display time is set. In the case of the high probability final fluctuation, a display time of 2000 ms is set regardless of the result.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is off, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is off (step Y659). If the special figure 2 is off (step Y659; Y), the flow shifts to step Y674. If the special figure 2 is not out of the way (step Y659; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y660). Whether the special figure 1 change display game is running or not can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  If the special figure 1 change display game is not being executed (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y670. If the special figure 1 change display game is being executed (step Y660; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 displaying process is in progress (step Y661). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game that is being executed is forcibly stopped with a loss result based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already completed the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not been completed, the forced stop is also performed.

  When the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y661; Y), the process proceeds to step Y664. If the special figure 1 is not being displayed (N in step Y661), the number of times of output of the symbol determination number is updated by +1 (step Y662), and the process proceeds to step Y664.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y664), a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area to prepare it (step Y665), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y666). ). Thereafter, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y668), and special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 is performed (step Y669).

  Then, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y670), and the special figure 2 small hit is determined, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is the small hit. Is determined (step Y671). When it is the special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. If the special figure 2 is not a small hit (step Y671; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y672). ), The information is loaded from the special winning opening opening information area and saved in the winning opening opening information area (step Y673).

  Thereafter, information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area, saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y674), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting processing 1 is performed (step Y675). The displaying process ends.

[Special figure 1 display in progress transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 58 shows the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1 (step Y645) in the above-described special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 1 display processing shift setting processing 1, first, a special figure 1 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 1 display processing is set (step Y681), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Is saved (step Y682).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as a control information of the special figure 1 display 51 in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag relating to the stop of the change in the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step Y684). ), The special figure 1 changing process shift setting process 1 ends.

[Special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 59 shows the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1 (step Y675) in the above-described special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 2 display processing shift setting processing 1, first, the special figure 2 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 2 display processing is set (step Y691), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Is saved (step Y692).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as a control information of the special figure 2 change display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag relating to the change stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (step Y694). ), The special figure 2 changing process shift setting process 1 ends.

[Special figure 1 display in progress transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 60 shows the special figure 1 displaying processing shift setting processing 2 (step Y669) in the above-described special figure 2 changing processing. In the special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2, first, a special figure 1 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 1 display processing is set (step Y701), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Is saved (step Y702).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and thereafter, the special figure 1 display 51 displays the special figure 1 The stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y704).

  The processing up to this point is the same as the above-described special figure 1 display-in-process shift setting processing 1, and thereafter, information for setting a result of a loss is set. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y706).

  Next, the special figure 1 large winning opening information area is cleared (step Y707), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y708), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y709). ). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step Y710), the slip stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y711), and the design data corresponding to the slip stop symbol number is output as a test signal. The data is saved in the data area (step Y712), and the special figure 1 in-display process shift setting process 2 ends.

[Special figure 2 display in progress process setting process 2]
FIG. 61 shows the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 2 (step Y639) in the above-described special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 2 display processing shift setting processing 2, first, a special figure 2 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 2 display processing is set (step Y721), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Is saved (step Y722).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the change of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 2 change display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 is displayed. The stop flag relating to the stop of the fluctuation on the display 52 is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of the special figure 2 (step Y724).

  Up to this point, the process is the same as the above-described special figure 2 display-in-process shift setting process 1, and thereafter, information for setting a loss result is set. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y726).

  Next, the special figure 2 big win opening information area is cleared (step Y727), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y728), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y729). ). Then, the special symbol 2 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step Y730), and the special symbol 2 stop symbol area is saved with the special symbol number (step Y731), and the symbol data corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol number is output as a test signal. The data is saved in the data area (step Y732), and the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2 ends.

  By the processing of FIGS. 56 to 61 described above, when one special figure variable display game has a special result, the other special figure variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disconnection result. That is, based on the special result of the special figure 1 variable display game, a first end control process is performed in which the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped on the result of the special figure 2 and the special figure 2 variable display game is changed to the special result. As a result, a second end control process in which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the disconnection is performed.

  In the process (steps Y732 and Y712) of saving the design data corresponding to the outage stop symbol number in the test signal output data area, a test signal corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game stopped by the trial shooting test device is taken. It should be done by the timing. For example, a process of saving the symbol data corresponding to the missing stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (steps Y712 and Y732) and a process of saving a signal relating to the end of fluctuation in the test signal output data area (steps Y703 and Y723). Although the processing is performed at one interrupt timing, the processing (steps Y712 and Y732) of saving the symbol data corresponding to the missing stop symbol number in the test signal output data area is performed, and the interrupt timing after the data is output is performed. Then, a process (steps Y703 and Y723) of saving a signal relating to the end of fluctuation in the test signal output data area may be performed. That is, for a special figure change display game that is changed to a loss result, a test signal indicating that the result is a deviation result may be output before the output of the test signal regarding the end of the change.

  From the above, the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variable display game when performing the execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). When the second variable display game (the special figure 2 variable display game) whose execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has a special result, the first variable display game performing the execution control Can be ended as a result other than the special result, and the second variable display game execution control means executes the first variable display game execution control means when performing the execution control of the second variable display game. When the first variable display game being controlled has a special result, the second variable display game performing the execution control can be ended as a result other than the special result. The Rukoto. With this, when a special result is derived in one of the variable display games, the other variable display game can be forcibly stopped with a disconnection result, so that no trouble occurs even when simultaneous fluctuation is performed. Can be

[Processing while displaying special figure 1]
62 and 63 show the special figure 1 displaying process (step Y110) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In this special figure 1 display processing, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing is loaded (step Y751), and the small hit flag is set. One area is cleared (step Y752).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing is loaded (step Y753), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y754). Then, the special figure 1 judges whether the big hit is, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y755), and if it is not a big hit (step Y755; N), the process shifts to step Y777. If it is a big hit (step Y755; Y), a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variable display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, The middle signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

  Thereafter, a round number upper limit table is set (step Y759), and a round number upper limit value (16, 8, 4, or 2 in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained, and the round number upper limit value is obtained. It is saved in the area (step Y760). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

  Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the design command area and prepared (step Y762), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y763). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y765).

  Next, the special winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure change display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of the present embodiment, in step Y766, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability change D1, is turned on when the 2R probability change D1 is in the high probability state, and is 2R probability change in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned off. The three jackpot signals are turned on when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability change D1, turned off when the 2R probability change D1 is in the high probability state, and the 2R probability change in the low probability state. It is turned ON when it is D1.

  Thereafter, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms or 4 ms) corresponding to the big win opening information is set (step Y767), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). . Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the upper winning prize port (first special variable prize winning device 38) (step Y769).

  If it is a big hit to open the upper winning prize mouth (step Y769; Y), the upper winning prize mouth illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y770), and the unauthorized monitoring outside flag is set in the upper winning prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step Y771), and the flow shifts to step Y774. On the other hand, if the big hit is not a big hit to open the big win (step Y769; N), that is, if the big hit is to open the special big win (the second special variable winning device 39), the lower big win is illegally won. Is cleared (step Y772), the flag outside the unauthorized monitoring period is saved in the lower winning award opening unauthorized monitoring period flag area (step Y773), and the flow shifts to step Y774.

  Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y774) and saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775). Further, a fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 displaying processing ends.

  On the other hand, in step Y755, if the special map 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N), that is, if the big hit flag 1 is out-of-position information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y777). If the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), it is determined whether the game is the high probability final change, that is, the last special figure change display game in which the lottery in the high probability state is performed. A determination is made (step Y778).

  If it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y778; N), the flow shifts to step Y783. If it is the high probability final variation (step Y778; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y779), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y780). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y781), and the left-turn instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y782). By clearing the left-handing instruction notification flag, the left-handing instruction notification command is set in the next ordinary processing of the special figure 1 to be performed next, and the notification for instructing left-handing is performed.

  Thereafter, commands are loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare them (step Y783), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y784). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y786), and a signal related to the right strike instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, it is set so that the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing right-hand operation is provided.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit to open the upper winning prize port (the first special variable winning device 38) (step Y792). If it is a small hit to open the upper winning prize port (step Y792; Y), The upper winning prize opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y793), the illegal monitoring outside period flag is saved in the upper winning prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y794), and the process proceeds to step Y797. On the other hand, if the winning is not a small hit that opens the upper winning prize (Step Y792; N), that is, if it is a small hit that opens the lower winning prize (the second special variable winning device 39), the lower winning prize is illegally won. After clearing several areas (step Y795), a flag outside the unauthorized monitoring period is saved in the lower winning award opening unauthorized monitoring period flag area (step Y796), and the process proceeds to step Y797. Then, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing (step Y797) is performed, and the special figure 1 displaying middle processing ends.

  If it is determined in step Y777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), it is a high-probability final change, that is, the last special figure in which the lottery is performed in the high-probability state. It is determined whether or not the game is a variable display game (step Y798).

  If it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y798; N), the process proceeds to step Y806. If it is a high-probability final variation (step Y798; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y799), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y800). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y801), the left-turn instruction notification flag and the high probability final change flag are cleared (step Y802), and the high probability state and the time saving state are cleared. A signal about the end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y803). Here, it is set so that the two big hit signals are turned off.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special figure 2, that is, the second special game state based on the small hit generated in the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y804). When the small hit in the special map 2 is being performed (step Y804; Y), the process proceeds to step Y807. Thus, the state of instructing right-handing is maintained. If the small hit is not occurring in the special figure 2 (step Y804; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y805), and the left-handed state is displayed in the gaming state display number 2 area. The number is saved (step Y806). After that, the special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y807), the special figure 1 normal processing shift setting processing 1 is performed (step Y808), and the special figure 1 displaying processing ends. .

[Special figure 2 display processing]
64 and 65 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y141) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. The special figure 2 displaying process is the same as the special figure 1 displaying process described above, except that the special figure 2 is displayed. In this special figure 2 display processing, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 change start processing is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is set. The two areas are cleared (step Y812).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 change start processing is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, the special map 2 judges whether the big hit is the big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is the big hit information (step Y815). If the big hit is not the big hit (step Y815; N), the process proceeds to step Y837. In the case of a big hit (step Y815; Y), a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, The middle signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

  Thereafter, a round number upper limit table is set (step Y819), the round number upper limit value (16, 8, 4, or 2 in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained, and the round number upper limit value is obtained. It is saved in the area (step Y820). Further, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

  Next, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the design command area to prepare (step Y822), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y823). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y825).

  Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure change display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of the present embodiment, in step Y826, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability change D1, is turned on when the 2R probability change D1 is in the high probability state, and is 2R probability change in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned off. The three jackpot signals are turned on when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability change D1, turned off when the 2R probability change D1 is in the high probability state, and the 2R probability change in the low probability state. It is turned ON when it is D1.

  After that, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms, or 4 ms) corresponding to the big win opening information is set (step Y827), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). . Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the upper winning prize port (the first special variable prize winning device 38) (step Y829).

  If it is a big hit to open the big winning opening (step Y829; Y), the big winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y830), and the illegal out-of-monitoring period flag is set in the big winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step Y831), and the flow shifts to step Y834. On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot that opens the upper winning opening (step Y829; N), that is, if it is a jackpot that opens the lower winning opening (the second special variable winning device 39), the lower winning opening illegal winning number area Is cleared (step Y832), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the lower winning award opening irregularity monitoring period flag area (step Y833), and the flow shifts to step Y834.

  Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y834) and saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y835). Further, a fanfare / interval mid-process transition setting process (step Y836) is performed, and the special figure 2 displaying process ends.

  On the other hand, in step Y815, if the special map 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is out-of-position information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y837). When the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), it is determined whether the game is the high probability final change, that is, the last special figure change display game in which the lottery in the high probability state is performed. A determination is made (step Y838).

  If it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y838; N), the flow shifts to step Y843. If it is the high probability final variation (step Y838; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y839), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y840). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y841), and the left-turn instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y842). By clearing the left-handing instruction notification flag, the left-handing instruction notification command is set in the next ordinary processing of the special figure 1 to be performed next, and the notification for instructing left-handing is performed.

  Thereafter, commands are loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare them (step Y843), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y844). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y846), and a signal related to a right strike instruction is saved in a test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, it is set so that the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing right-hand operation is provided.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit to open the upper winning prize port (the first special variable winning device 38) (step Y852). If it is a small hit to open the upper winning prize port (step Y852; Y), The upper winning prize mouth illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y853), the illegal monitoring outside period flag is saved in the upper winning prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and the process proceeds to step Y857. On the other hand, if the winning is not a small hit opening the upper winning prize (Step Y852; N), that is, if the winning is a small hit opening the lower winning prize (the second special variable winning device 39), the lower winning prize is illegally won. After clearing several areas (step Y855), a flag outside the unauthorized monitoring period is saved in the lower winning award opening unauthorized monitoring period flag area (step Y856), and the process proceeds to step Y857. Then, a special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing (step Y857) is performed, and the special figure 2 displaying middle processing ends.

  If it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), it is a high-probability final change, that is, the last special figure in which the lottery is performed in the high-probability state. It is determined whether or not the game is a variable display game (step Y858). If it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y858; N), the process proceeds to step Y866. If it is the high probability final variation (step Y858; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y859), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y860). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power transmission restoration transmission command area (step Y861), the left-handing instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y862), and the high probability state and the time saving state are cleared. Is saved in the external information output data area (step Y863). Here, it is set so that the two big hit signals are turned off.

  Next, it is determined whether a special hit is occurring during the small hit of the special figure 1, that is, a second special game state based on the small hit generated in the special figure 1 variable display game (step Y864). If the small hit in the special map 1 is in progress (step Y864; Y), the flow shifts to step Y867. Thus, the state of instructing right-handing is maintained. If the small hit in the special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y864; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y865), and the left-handed state is displayed in the gaming state display number 2 area. The number is saved (step Y866). Thereafter, the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (subtraction of information) (step Y867), the special figure 2 normal processing transition setting processing 1 is performed (step Y868), and the special figure 2 displaying processing ends. .

  That is, based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result, the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the activation of the condition device. And a second special game generating means for generating a second special game state for opening the special variable winning device without operating the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has the second special result. Eggplant

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 66 illustrates details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y776 and Y836) in the above-described special figure 1 displaying processing and special figure 2 displaying processing. In this fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, first, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, one big hit signal output at a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (special symbol fluctuation time reduction state) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 change time reduction state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 change time reduction state signal is set to OFF.

  After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the number with a low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special figure game mode is executed. The special figure low probability flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

  Then, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area for saving a command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step Y876), and a special figure variation display executable in the high probability state The high-probability-variation-number region for managing the number of games is cleared (step Y877). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are terminated, and the normal state and the normal state are established.

  Next, the big hit information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), and the high probability final fluctuation flag area is cleared (step Y879). Further, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y881). Thereafter, the low-figure low-probability flag is saved in the high-figure game mode flag area (step Y882), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing ends.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 67 shows the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing (step Y797) in the above-described special figure 1 displaying processing. In the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing, first, “7” related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, one big hit signal and four big hit signals output at the big hit or the small hit are set to ON. Further, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to ON.

  After that, the small hit information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y896), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing ends. I do.

[Special figure 2 Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 68 shows the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing (step Y857) in the above-described special figure 2 displaying processing. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing, first, “7” related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y901), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y902).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, one big hit signal and four big hit signals output at the big hit or the small hit are set to ON. Further, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

  Thereafter, the small hit information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing ends. I do.

[Fanfare / interval processing]
FIG. 69 shows the fanfare / interval processing (steps Y111 and Y142) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y951), round winning opening information and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared (step Y952), and a rendering command setting processing is performed. Is performed (step Y953).

  Next, the jackpot processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot processing control pointer area (step Y955). When the opening and closing are repeated in one round, 0 is set as the initial value of the big hit processing control pointer. Here, the 5th R of the 16R certainty change F3 (the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 5 in the special figure 2) is equivalent. In addition, when performing one continuous opening in one round, 21 which is the big hit operation end value is set. The initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

  Then, the special winning opening opening information and the special winning opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the processing number (step Y957). The opening time set here is, for example, any of 200 ms, 600 ms, 1600 ms, and 29000 ms.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y958). If it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y958; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y959). ), The special winning opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y958; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y961), and the special winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y962).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the big win (first special variable winning device 38) is a big hit (step Y963). It is possible to determine from the set special winning opening opening information whether the big winning opening is a big hit. If it is a big winning opening opening big hit (step Y963; Y), the processing shift setting processing 1 during the opening of the big winning opening is performed (step Y964), and the processing during the fanfare / interval ends. If the big winning opening is not a big hit (step Y963; N), a special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2 is performed (step Y965), and the fanfare / interval process ends.

[Grand Winner Opening Process Shift Setting Process 1]
FIG. 70 shows the processing transfer setting processing 1 during the opening of the special winning opening in the above-described processing during the fanfare / interval (step Y964). In the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 1, first, a signal relating to the opening start of the upper winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y971). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the opening / closing member 38c of the first special variable winning device 38, the large winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y972), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is counted. The special winning opening count is cleared (step Y973), and the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 1 ends.

[Grand prize opening opening process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 71 shows the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2 (step Y965) in the above-described fanfare / interval process. In the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of opening the lower winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y981). Here, the special electric accessory 2 in-operation signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the opening / closing member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, the lower special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y982), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is counted. The special winning opening count is cleared (step Y983), and the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2 ends.

(Processing while opening the big winning opening)
FIG. 72 shows the special winning opening process (steps Y112 and Y143) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing described above. In the processing during opening of the special winning opening, first, the control pointer during the big hit is loaded (step Y1001), and it is determined whether or not the loaded value is equal to or larger than the big hit operation end value (here, 21) (step Y1002).

  If the loaded value is not greater than the big hit operation end value (21 in this case) (step Y1002; N), a big hit operation shift setting process is performed (step Y1003), and the big hit big process control pointer is updated by +1 (step Y1004). Then, the processing during opening of the special winning opening is ended. In this case, the opening and closing are performed during one round, and the opening and closing mode of the special variable winning device is set according to the updated big hit processing control pointer.

  On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the jackpot operation end value (here, 21) (step Y1002; Y), the current round number in the special game state being executed and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area are To determine whether the current round is the last round (step Y1005). If it is not the last round (step Y1005; N), an interval command relating to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and effect command setting processing (step Y1008) is performed. In the case of the last round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared (step Y1007), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008). I do.

  Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is set (step Y1009), and 5 relating to the special winning port remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1010). The remaining sphere processing time is set to 600 ms, 800 ms or 1400 ms. Then, it is determined whether it is the big hit of Toku-zu 1 (step Y1011).

  In the case of the special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1011; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1012). Step Y1013). On the other hand, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1011; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1014), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y1015).

  Thereafter, the OFF data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the processing during opening of the special winning opening is ended. In step Y1016, the off data is set for both the upper special winning opening solenoid and the lower special winning opening solenoid, and the closing process is performed for both the special winning opening.

[Big hit operation transition setting process]
FIG. 73 shows the jackpot operation transition setting process (step Y1004) in the above-described winning opening process. In the big hit operation transition setting process, first, a branch process is performed depending on whether the value of the big hit mid-process control pointer is an even number or an odd number (step Y1021). Here, branch processing is performed on the assumption that 0 is an even number.

  If the value of the big hit processing control pointer is an even number in step Y1021, a wait time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1022). Here, 1500 ms is set as the wait time. Note that different wait times may be set depending on the value of the pointer. Next, the OFF data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1023), and the flow shifts to step Y1026. In step Y1023, OFF data is set for both the upper winning opening solenoid and the lower winning opening solenoid, and the closing process is performed for any winning opening.

  On the other hand, if the value of the large hit processing control pointer is an odd number in step Y1021, a special winning opening time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1024). Here, 200 ms is set when the value of the big hit processing control pointer is 1 to 19, and 25000 ms when it is 21, as the special winning opening time. Next, the upper winning opening data is saved in the winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1025), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since only the upper winning prize port (first special variable prize winning device 38) repeats opening and closing during one round, the ON data is saved for the upper prize winning solenoid in step Y1024. doing. Of course, depending on the setting of the gaming machine, the lower large winning opening (the second special variable winning device 39) may be configured to be repeatedly opened and closed in one round.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special hit is a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1026). If the big hit is the special figure 1 (step Y1026; Y), the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1026). (Step Y1027), the big hit operation transition setting process ends. If it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1026; N), the set time is saved in the game processing timer area of the special figure 2 (step Y1028), and the big hit operation transition setting processing ends. By the above processing, opening and closing of the special winning opening can be repeated in one round.

(Grand prize mouth remaining ball processing)
FIG. 74 shows the special winning port remaining ball processing (steps Y113 and Y144) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing described above. In the special winning opening remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the last round. (Step Y1041).

  If the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), a signal regarding the end of opening of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, an interval time corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds this time is set (step Y1043), and 3 related to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step Y1044).

  The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of the round when the remaining ball processing time elapses and further until the interval time elapses after the remaining ball processing time elapses. For example, in the case of the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 in the special figure 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, the interval period is 2000 ms, and in this interval period, the interval effect is displayed on the display device 41 or the like. Is executed.

  On the other hand, if the current round in the special game state is the last round (step Y1041; Y), a jackpot end process shift setting process is performed (step Y1045), and an ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y1045). Y1046), 6 relating to the special figure 1 big hit end processing or the special figure 2 big hit end processing is set as the processing number (step Y1047).

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is the big hit of Tokuzu 1 (step Y1048). If it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1048; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1048). Y1050), the special winning port remaining ball processing ends. On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1048; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1051). Step Y1052), the special winning port remaining sphere process ends.

  The ending period from the end of the last round to the end of the special game state is a period from the end of the last round, when the remaining ball processing time elapses, and further, after the remaining ball processing time elapses, until the ending time elapses. For example, in the case of the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 in Special Figure 1, the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, so the ending period is 11000 ms, and during this ending period, the ending effect on the display device 41 or the like. Is executed.

[Big hit end process shift setting process]
FIG. 75 shows the jackpot end process shift setting process (step Y1045) in the above-described big winning port remaining ball process. In the jackpot end processing shift setting processing, first, a signal relating to the end of opening of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF.

  Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step Y1072), and the information of the round number area storing the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step Y1073). ), The information of the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step Y1074).

  Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step Y1075), and the flag for the special winning opening information area for storing the opening information for the special winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information in the large hit control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the special winning opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the big hit end processing shift setting processing ends.

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 76 shows the special figure 1 big hit end processing (step Y114) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In the special figure 1 big hit end processing, first, “0” is set as the processing number related to the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y1101), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1102).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1103). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (general power support state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1104). Here, two big hit signals are set to ON. Note that the big hit 2 signal is also ON during the special game state, and this is continued.

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1105). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF. Next, signals related to the start of the high probability state and the time reduction state are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1106). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 change time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 change time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1107). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number with a high probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y1108). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the time is always reduced during the high probability, the numbers are assigned to the high probability numbers without distinction. Thereafter, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1109), and the unlit number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1110).

  Next, a flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the upper winning award opening unauthorized monitoring period flag area (step Y1111), and a flag during the unauthorized monitoring period is saved in the lower winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y1112). The special figure status area is cleared (step Y1113). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

  Thereafter, the high-probability flag is saved in the special-figure game mode flag area (step Y1114), and the initial value (here, 50) is stored in the high-probability fluctuation count area for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state. ) Is saved (step Y1115). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1116), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (here, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1116). Y1117), the general figure high probability flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area (step Y1118), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing ends.

  By performing the special figure 1 big hit end processing, the special figure change display game can be started for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is executed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the process, the special figure 2 game display processing is started by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and the special figure 2 variable display game is started more than the special figure 1 variable display game. Will be able to start earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1117, the start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt. Note that the special figure 2 variable display game may be started earlier without setting the special figure 2 game wait time value.

  That is, after the game control device 100 finishes the special game state, the second variable display game execution control unit executes the second variable display game execution control unit until the first variable display game execution control unit can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game. A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the two-variation display game from being made executable.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 77 shows the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. This special figure 2 big hit end processing is the same processing except that step Y1117 in the above special figure 1 big hit processing is not performed.

  First, “0” is set as a process number relating to the special figure 2 ordinary processing (step Y1121), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1122). Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1123). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (general power support state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1124). Here, two big hit signals are set to ON. Note that the big hit 2 signal is also ON during the special game state, and this is continued.

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1125). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF. Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time reduction state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 change time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 change time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1127). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number with a high probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y1128). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the time is always reduced during the high probability, the numbers are assigned to the high probability numbers without distinction. Thereafter, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1129), and the unlit number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1130).

  Next, the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the upper winning award opening unauthorized monitoring period flag area (step Y1131), and the flag during the unauthorized monitoring period is saved in the lower winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y1132). The special figure status area is cleared (step Y1133). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

  Thereafter, the high-probability flag is saved in the special-figure game mode flag area (step Y1134), and the initial value (here, 50) is stored in the high-probability fluctuation count area for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state. ) Is saved (step Y1135). Furthermore, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1136), the universal figure high probability flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step Y1137), and the special figure 2 big hit end The process ends.

  By the special figure 1 big hit processing and the special figure 2 big hit processing, the specific game state which is the high probability state and the time saving state is set until the special figure change display game is executed 50 times after the end of the first special game state. It will be. That is, the specific game state generating means capable of generating the specific game state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game is a special result is increased over the predetermined period after the end of the special game state. Make Further, the specific game state generating means increases the probability that the result of the variable display game will be the first special result as compared with the normal state over a predetermined period as the specific game state.

[Treatment during small hit fanfare]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (steps Y115 and Y146) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in the small hit fanfare middle processing, first, a branch is performed according to an open pattern (step Y1201).

  If the open pattern is small hit 1 (special figure 1 lower big winning opening opening / closing pattern 1) in step Y1201, a small hit opening command of lower big winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) opening is prepared. (Step Y1202), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1203). Next, 8 for the small hitting process is set as the process number (step Y1204), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1205).

  Thereafter, the small hit opening time 1 (48 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1206), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1207). Here, the special electric accessory 2 in-operation signal is set to ON. Then, the lower winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1208), and the flow shifts to step Y1230.

  If the opening pattern is the small hit 2 (special figure 2 lower big winning opening opening / closing pattern 2) in step Y1201, the lower hit winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) opening small hit opening command is issued. It prepares (step Y1209) and performs an effect command setting process (step Y1210). Next, 8 relating to the small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1211), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1212).

  Thereafter, the small hit opening time 2 (1600 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1213), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1214). Here, the special electric accessory 2 in-operation signal is set to ON. Then, the lower winning opening data is saved in the winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1215), and the flow shifts to step Y1230.

  If the opening pattern is small hit 3 (special figure 2 upper winning prize opening opening / closing pattern 6) in step Y1201, a small hit opening command to open the upper winning prize opening (first special variable winning device 38) is issued. It prepares (step Y1216) and performs effect command setting processing (step Y1217). Next, 8 for the small hitting process is set as the process number (step Y1218), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1219).

  Thereafter, the small hit release time 3 (1200 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1220), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1221). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper winning port on data is saved in the special winning port solenoid output data area (step Y1222), and the flow shifts to step Y1230.

  If the open pattern is small hit 4 (special figure 2 upper winning prize opening opening / closing pattern 7) in step Y1201, a small hit opening command for opening the upper big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is issued. Preparation (step Y1223), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1224). Next, 8 relating to the small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1225), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1226).

  Thereafter, the small hit opening time 4 (1600 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1227), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1228). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper winning opening data is saved in the winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1229), and the flow shifts to step Y1230. After performing the processing according to the type of the small hit, the large winning opening count number area for counting the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step Y1230), and the processing during the small hit fanfare is ended.

[Small hit processing]
FIG. 79 shows the small hitting middle processing (steps Y116 and Y147) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the small hit processing, first, a small hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1242). Next, branching is performed according to an open pattern (step Y1243).

  If the open pattern is small hit 1 (special figure 1 lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 1) at step Y1243, 9 is set as the processing number for small hit remaining ball processing (step Y1244), and special figure 1 The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (step Y1245). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1246), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1247). The hit processing is terminated.

  If the opening pattern is the small hit 2 (special figure 2 lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 2) in step Y1243, 9 is set as the processing number for the small hit remaining ball processing (step Y1248), and the special figure 2 The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (step Y1249). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1250), and the OFF data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1251). The hit processing is terminated.

  If the opening pattern is 3 or 4 (small winning opening opening / closing pattern 6 or 7 in FIG. 2) in step Y1243, 9 is set as the processing number for small hit remaining ball processing (step Y1252). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1253). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (here, 800 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1254), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1255). The hit processing is terminated.

  In steps Y1247, Y1251, and Y1255, off data is set for both the upper winning opening solenoid and the lower winning opening solenoid, and the closing process is performed for any winning opening.

[Small hit ball processing]
FIG. 80 shows the small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117 and Y148) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is the small hit of Tokuzu 1 (step Y1271). In the case of the special figure 1 small hit (step Y1271; Y), the processing number is set to 10 relating to the special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y1272), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hit ending time (100 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the flow shifts to step Y1278.

  If the special hit is not the small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271; N), 10 relating to the special figure 2 small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1275), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time (100 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the flow shifts to step Y1278.

  Then, a signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal are set to OFF. Further, the large winning opening count number area is cleared (step Y1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing ends.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 81 shows the special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y118) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In the special figure 1 small hit ending processing, first, 0 which is related to the special figure 1 usual processing is set as the processing number (step Y1301), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1302).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower winning award opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the number of lights off is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1305). Y1306). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not high probability is in progress (step Y1307). If high probability is in progress (step Y1307; Y), the flow proceeds to step Y1310. If the probability is not high (step Y1307; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1309), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (here, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1310). . Here too, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, so that the start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing. And the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt. Note that the special figure 2 variable display game may be started earlier without setting the special figure 2 game wait time value. Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1311), and the special figure 1 small hit end processing is ended. Here, one big hit signal and four big hit signals are set to OFF.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 82 shows the special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. In the special figure 2 small hit ending processing, first, 0 which is related to the special figure 2 usual processing is set as the processing number (step Y1331), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1332).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the upper winning award opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), and the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the lower winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y1335). Thereafter, the number of the light-off is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1336), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1337). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a high probability is present (step Y1338). If a high probability is present (step Y1338; Y), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated. If the probability is not high (step Y1338; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1339). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1340), a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1341), and the special figure 2 small hit is ended. The process ends. Here, one big hit signal and four big hit signals are set to OFF.

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 83 shows the symbol variation control processing (steps Y120 and Y153) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 and setting the display data of the special symbol. In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is changing (step Y1401).

  If the fluctuation control flag is changing (step Y1402; Y), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1403), and a blink control timer for the symbol to be controlled is obtained. Is updated by -1 (step Y1404), and it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step Y1405).

  If the value of the blink control timer is not 0 (step Y1405; N), the flow shifts to step Y1408. If the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step Y1405; Y), the blinking control timer initial value (100 ms in this case) is saved in the blinking control timer area of the control target (step Y1406), and the symbol of the control target is saved. Is updated by +1 (step Y1407), and display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step Y1408). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the variation control flag is not varying (step Y1402; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1409). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (step Y1410), the obtained display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control processing ends. Thereby, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (step X112) in the above timer interrupt process will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55, the general figure hold display 75, the first game state display section 76, the second game state display provided on the collective display device 50 are provided. The unit 77 performs settings related to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the round display unit 60 and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 84, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blink control timer is updated by +1 (step X581), and it is determined whether or not the output ON timing is based on whether a specific bit of the blink control timer is 1 or not. (Step X582). In this embodiment, when the bit 5 of the blink control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on, so that a blink period of 128 ms is created.

  If it is the output ON timing (step X582; Y), the general figure reservation number display table 1 of the general figure reservation number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode on the general figure reservation display is specified is set. (Step X583) If it is not the output ON timing (Step X582; N), the ordinary figure reserved number display table 2 is set (Step X584). Then, display data corresponding to the number of reserved general-use drawings is acquired from the set number-of-regular-use reservation display table, and saved in the segment area of the general-use pending display (step X585). In the present embodiment, if the number of ordinary figure reservations is any one of “0” to “2”, the display data is the same regardless of which ordinary figure reservation number display table is set.

  Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step X586), and if it is the output on timing (step X586; Y), the special figure 1 reservation number in which the display mode on the special figure 1 reservation display is defined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step X587), and if it is not the output ON timing (step X586; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set (step X586; N). Step X588). Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table, and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold display (step X589).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step X590), and if it is the output on timing (step X590; Y), the special figure 2 reservation number display in which the display mode on the special figure 2 reservation display is specified is specified. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 reserved number display table 1 is set (step X591), and if it is not the output ON timing (step X590; N), the special figure 2 reserved number display table 2 is set (step X590). X592). Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is acquired from the set special figure 2 reservation number display table, and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 reservation display (step X593).

  Furthermore, a round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit is defined is set (step X594), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the round display unit (step X595). ).

  Next, the game state display table 1 is set in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 58 that lights up when the time reduction state occurs and notifies the user of the occurrence of the time reduction state is defined (step X596), and the game state display number is set. Is obtained and saved in the segment area of the first game state display section (step X597). In the present embodiment, the first game state display section including one LED is configured to be turned off during normal times and turned on during special figure time reduction (during normal power support).

  After that, a game state display table 2 is set which defines a display mode in the second game state display unit for notifying that a right-handed game is more advantageous than a left-handed game (step X598). The display data corresponding to the status display number 2 is acquired, saved in the segment area of the second game status display section (step X599), and the segment LED editing process ends. In the present embodiment, the second game state display unit composed of one LED is turned off at the time of normal hit (left hit) and at the time of right hit (in the case of the present embodiment, during a big hit, during a small hit, and during general power support). ) Is configured to light up.

[Magnet fraud monitoring processing]
FIG. 85 shows the magnet illegal monitoring process (step X113) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

  In the magnet unauthorized monitoring process, first, based on the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch) is turned on, that is, abnormal magnetism is detected. It is determined whether or not the state has been detected (step X611). If the magnet sensor is ON (step X611; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet irregularity monitoring timer that measures the period of detecting abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 to determine whether the timer has timed out. A determination is made (step X613).

  When the timer of the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step X613; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X614), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( Here, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet improper notification timer area (step X615). Then, a command for magnet impropriety notification is prepared (step X616), a magnet improper occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet improper flag (step X617), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet improper flag matches the value of the magnet improper flag area. (Step X613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch) is not turned on (step X611; N), that is, if abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X618), and the magnet fraud notification time is set. If the specified magnet fraud notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X619). Note that the minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is 0 (step X620). When the timer for monitoring unauthorized access to the magnet has not expired (step X613; N), the process also proceeds to the process of step X619.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X620; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. Further, when the value of the magnet fraudulent notification timer is 0 (step X620; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the period of the fraudulent notification has ended or fraudulent notification has been started from the beginning, If the command has not been performed, a command for terminating magnet improper notification is prepared (step X621). Further, a magnet invalid flag is prepared as a magnet invalid flag (step X622), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet invalid flag matches the value of the magnet invalid flag area (step X623).

  If the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step X623; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step X623; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step X624), effect command setting processing is performed (step X625), and the magnet fraud monitoring processing ends. I do.

(Panel radio fraud monitoring processing)
FIG. 86 shows the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

  In this panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the panel radio wave sensor 62 is checked from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121. It is determined whether it is on, that is, whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step X631). If the panel radio wave sensor is on (step X631; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (here, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step X632).

  Then, a command for informing the radio wave fraudulent information is prepared (step X633), and a fraudulent radio wave occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent radio wave flag (step X634). It is determined whether they match (step X639). That is, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when abnormal radio waves are detected, unlike the case of magnetic fraud.

  On the other hand, if the panel radio wave sensor is not on (step X631; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraudulent notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud time is updated by -1 unless the timer is 0 (step X631; N). Step X635). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is 0 (step X636).

  If the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is not 0 (step X636; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the panel radio wave irregularity monitoring process ends. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraudulent notification timer is 0 (step X636; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, and when the period of the fraudulent notification is over or the fraudulent notification is started from the beginning, If not performed, a command for ending the dish radio wave notification is prepared (step X637), a disc radio fraud release flag is prepared as a disc radio fraud flag (step X638), and the prepared disc radio fraud flag is set to the disc radio fraud flag. It is determined whether the value matches the value of the invalid flag area (step X639).

  If the prepared panel radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the panel radio wave fraud flag area (step X639; Y), the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step X639; N), the prepared board radio wave illegal flag is saved in the panel radio wave illegal flag area (step X640), effect command setting processing is performed (step X641), and the panel radio wave illegal monitoring is performed. The process ends.

[External information editing processing]
FIG. 87 shows the external information editing process (step X115) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the external information editing processing, monitoring results in the payout command transmission processing (step X105), the winning port switch / state monitoring processing (step X108), the magnet illegal monitoring processing (step X113), the panel radio wave illegal monitoring processing (step X114), and the like. Based on the information, information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test shooting test device is created and set in an output buffer.

  In this external information editing process, first, it is determined whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701). If the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step X701; N), the main body frame (front frame 12) is determined. It is determined whether an open error is occurring (step X702). If no body frame opening error is occurring (step X702; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X703), and the security data off data is stored in the external information. The data is saved in the output data area (step X704), and the process proceeds to step X707.

  On the other hand, if a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701; Y) or if a body frame (front frame 12) opening error is occurring (step X702; Y), a door / frame opening signal is output. The ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X705), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X706), and the process proceeds to step X707. That is, information that the glass frame 14 and the front frame 12 are open is output as external information.

  Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not 0, -1 is updated (step X707). ). Note that the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0.

  If the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X708; N), that is, if the time is not up, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. Transition. Thus, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information. If the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step X708; Y), it is determined whether or not frame radio wave fraud, which is to detect an abnormal radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12, is occurring. Is determined (step X709).

  If a frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; Y), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. If the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (step X709; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of a switch connector is occurring (step X711). If a switch abnormality error is not occurring (step X711; N), the process proceeds to step X713. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (step X711; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X712), and the process proceeds to step X713.

  If at least one of a magnet fraud is occurring (Step X713; Y), a board radio wave fraud is occurring (Step X714; Y), and a special winning opening fraud is occurring (Step X715; Y), the security signal The ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X718), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X719), and the process proceeds to step X720. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information. If no error has occurred in any of steps X713 to X715, the OFF data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X717), and the process proceeds to step X720.

  Then, a starting port 1 signal editing process for editing a winning signal to the first starting winning port 36 (step X720), a starting port 2 signal editing process for editing a winning signal to the normal variable winning device 37 (step X721), A starting port 3 signal editing process (step X722) for editing a winning signal to the 2 starting winning port 97 is performed. Next, a main prize ball signal editing process for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out (step X723) is performed, and a symbol determination frequency signal editing process for setting information relating to the number of executions of the special figure variable display game is performed. (Step X724), the external information editing process ends.

[Start port 1 signal editing process]
FIG. 88 shows the starting port 1 signal editing process (step X720) in the above-described external information editing process. In the start-up port 1 signal editing process, first, if the start-up port 1 signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X731). Note that the minimum value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732). If the value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732; Y), it is determined whether the number of starting port 1 signal outputs is 0 (step X733).

  If the number of times of starting port 1 signal output is not 0 (step X733; N), the number of times of starting port 1 signal output is updated by -1 (step X734), and the starting port 1 signal output control timer area outputs the starting port 1 signal. The control timer initial value is saved (step X735). The initial value of the start-up port 1 signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the on-state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off-state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start-up signal. (For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the ON data for turning on the start-up port 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X737), and the start-up port 1 signal editing process ends. If the start port 1 signal output count is 0 (step X733; Y), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X738). ), The start-up opening 1 signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (step X732; N), it is determined whether the starting port 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X736). The start-up port 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON period when the value of the start-up port 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start-up opening 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step X736; Y), the process proceeds to step X737. When the start-up port 1 signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step X736; N), off data for turning off the start-up port 1 signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X738), and ends the start-up opening 1 signal editing process. The starting port 2 signal editing processing (step X721) and the starting port 3 signal editing processing (step X722) in the above-described external information editing processing are the same processing as the starting port 1 signal editing processing. This is performed for three signals.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
FIG. 89 shows a main prize ball signal editing process (step X723) in the above-described external information editing process. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs a main prize ball signal, which is generated each time the number of prize balls (planned number of payouts) generated due to winning in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10), to an external device. Processing.

  In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X741). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the main award ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is 0 (step X743).

  If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (step X743; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by -1 (step X744), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area outputs the main prize ball signal output. The control timer initial value is saved (step X745). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (for example, 128 ms) of the on state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) of the off state (for example, low level). Time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X747), and the main prize ball signal editing process ends. If the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is 0 (step X743; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X743). X748), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main award ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step X742; N), it is determined whether or not the main award ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X746). Here, that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X746; Y), the process proceeds to step X747. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step X746; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

[Symbol decision count signal editing process]
FIG. 90 shows the symbol determination count signal editing process (step X724) in the above-described external information editing process. The symbol determination number signal editing process is a process for controlling the output time of information relating to the number of executions of the special figure change display game.

  In the symbol determination frequency signal editing process, first, if the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X751). The minimum value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol determination count signal output control timer is 0 (step X752). If the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is 0 (step X752; Y), it is determined whether the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency, which is updated by +1 every time the special figure variable display game ends, is 0. (Step X753).

  If the number of times of output of the symbol determination frequency signal is not 0 (step X753; N), the number of times of output of the symbol determination frequency signal is updated by -1 (step X754), and the main prize ball signal is output to the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step X755). The initial value of the symbol determination count signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time of the symbol determination count signal on (for example, high level) (128 ms here) and the time of the off state (for example, low level) (64 ms here). It is time (here, 192 ms).

  Thereafter, the ON data for turning on the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X757), and the symbol determination frequency signal editing process is terminated. If the number of times the symbol determination frequency signal is output is 0 (step X753; Y), off data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X753). X758), the symbol determination count signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not 0 (step X752; N), it is determined whether the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X756). Here, that the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output ON section means that the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the symbol determination count signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X756; Y), the process proceeds to step X757. If the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step X756; N), off data for turning off the symbol determination number signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), and ends the symbol determination count signal editing process.

  Next, effects on the display device 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 91 (a), at the center of the display area of the display device 41, there is provided a decoration special figure variation display game display section 85 for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game set as a main display symbol. The decoration special figure change display game display unit 85 displays the decoration special figure change display game by variably displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right change display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information.

  The decorative special figure variable display game includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. In the effect control device 300, one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is set as a main display symbol, and the other is set as a sub display symbol. Whether the main display symbol is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 can be set by the effect control device 300 according to the state of the game, and can also be set by operating the effect button 25 by a player or the like. .

  At the upper left of the display area, there is provided a second decoration game display section 88 for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game set as a sub display symbol. The second decorative game display section 88 includes a special figure 1 second decorative game display section 88a for displaying a decorative special figure 1 variable display game, and a special figure 2 second decorative game for displaying a decorative special figure 2 variable display game. A display unit 88b is provided, and it is possible to determine which special figure is set as the sub display symbol by the display position. The second decoration game displayed on each of the special figure 1 second decoration game display section 88a and the special figure 2 second decoration game display section 88b of the second decoration game display section 88 is a decoration special figure change display game display section. As in the case of 85, the identification information is variably displayed in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area, and then stopped and the result is displayed.

  In FIG. 91 (a), for the sake of explanation, the decorative special figure change display game is displayed on both the special figure 1 second decorative game display section 88a and the special figure 2 second decorative game display section 88b. However, in actuality, only the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure (special figure 2 in FIG. 91 (b)) set as the sub display symbol as shown in FIG. Will be displayed. Of course, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), the decorative special figure variation display game of both special figures may be always displayed. The arrangement of the special figure 1 second decoration game display section 88a and the special figure 2 second decoration game display section 88b is not limited to the arrangement shown here, but may be any different position in the display area. Also, in the second decoration game display section 88, the special figure 1 second decoration game display section 88a and the special figure 2 second decoration game display section 88b are different display sections. You may make it display the decoration special figure fluctuation | variation display game set as the sub display design among a display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation | variation display game.

  Also, as for the decorative special figure variable display game display section 85, the display section for displaying the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the display section for displaying the decorative special figure 2 variable display game may be different display sections. good. Also, instead of enabling the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 to be distinguished by the position of the display unit in the decoration special figure change display game display unit 85 and the second decoration game display unit 88, the color and shape of the identification information are specified. The determination may be made by making the difference between FIG. 1 and FIG. Further, information indicating which one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be displayed may be displayed, or the identification may be made by a sound such as a background, a lamp, or BGM.

  Further, a storage display unit 83 for displaying a decoration special figure start storage display corresponding to the start memory is provided at the lower center of the display area. The storage display unit 83 is provided with a first storage display unit 83a that displays the first start storage and a second storage display unit 83b that displays the second start storage. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the first memory display unit 83a is one-to-one corresponding to the first start memory and is displayed side by side in the storage order. Here, there are three first start memories. It is shown that. The decorative special figure start storage display at the left end is the decorative special figure start storage display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left every time the display is completed.

  In addition, it is possible to suggest the result of the pre-reading such as the result of the special figure 1 change display game and the change pattern corresponding to each start memory by the display mode. In FIG. 91 (a), a look-ahead effect in which the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display is changed for the first start memory having the first digestion order is performed. Further, the second storage display unit 83b displays a decoration special figure start storage display corresponding to the second start storage on a one-to-one basis, similarly to the first storage display unit 83a. Here, it is shown that there are three second start memories.

  On the left side of the first storage display unit 83a, there is provided a first execution storage display unit 84a that forms an execution storage display unit 84 that displays information related to start storage corresponding to the currently executed special figure 1 variable display game. Have been. At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the decoration special figure start storage display at the left end of the first storage display section 83a is shifted to the first running storage display section 84a, and the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is executed. The result, the fluctuation pattern, and the like are indicated by the display mode.

  On the left side of the second storage display unit 83b, a second execution storage display unit 84b that forms an execution storage display unit 84 that displays information related to start storage corresponding to the currently executed special figure 2 variable display game is provided. Have been. At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, the decoration special figure start storage display at the left end of the second memory display section 83b is shifted to the second running storage display section 84b, and the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed is executed. The result, the fluctuation pattern, and the like are indicated by the display mode.

  In the upper right part of the display area, a start storage number display section 86 for displaying the start storage number is provided. The number-of-starting-storages display section 86 is provided with a first-starting-storage-number display section 86a for displaying the number of first starting memories, and a second-starting-memory number display section 86b for displaying the number of second starting memories. ing.

  FIGS. 91B to 91H show an example of display when the special figure change display game is being executed. When the first start memory is consumed and reduced from the state shown in FIG. 91 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the first storage display unit 83a is being executed for the first time as shown in FIG. 91 (b). The display flowing into the storage display unit 84a is performed. Here, the result of the special figure change display game, the change pattern, and the like are also suggested in the first execution storage display unit 84a in the same manner as the prefetch effect. Also, in the start storage number display section 86, the numerical value of the first start storage number display section 86a is decreased by one. Here, the special figure 1 is set as the main display symbol, and the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 displays a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory. After the start, the variable display of the identification information is started in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas.

  When the second start memory is exhausted and reduced from the state shown in FIG. 91 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the second memory display section 83b becomes the second display as shown in FIG. 91 (b). The display that flows into the in-execution storage display unit 84b is performed. Here, the result and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game are not suggested in the second execution storage display unit 84b. Further, in the start storage number display section 86, the numerical value of the second start storage number display section 86b is decreased by one. Also, here, the special figure 2 is set to the sub display symbol, and the second special game display section 88 displays the special special figure change display game only on the second special game display section 88b. 2. The decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory is started on the second decorative game display section 88b, and the identification information is displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas. The variable display is started.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (c), in the decorative special figure variation display game display section 85, first, the identification information temporarily stops in the left variation display area. In the state where the vehicle is temporarily stopped, the identification information is displayed so as to fluctuate, indicating that the vehicle is not completely stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (d), the identification information temporarily stops in the right fluctuation display area. Here, the reach state in which the same identification information stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area is reached, and the reach effect is started. Of course, different identification information may be stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area and the reach state may not be achieved. Thus, in the state of the reach state, the first-half fluctuation is performed until the right-variation display area temporarily stops, and the second-half fluctuation thereafter.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (e), the identification information temporarily stops in the middle fluctuation display area, and the identification information temporarily stops in all the fluctuation display areas of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game display section 85. Note that the temporarily stopped state is equivalent to the state in which the variable display is being performed, and here, the state in which the variable display is still being performed. Thereafter, when the variable time of the special figure variable display game ends, as shown in FIG. 91 (f), the identification information of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 is stopped, and the result mode is displayed.

  Further, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game ends with the end of the stop time of the special figure 1 variable display game. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 91 (g), the display of the first execution storage display unit 84a is erased, and the next decorative special figure 1 variable display game can be started. Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (h), the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the new first start memory, and the corresponding special figure variable display game display section 85 starts the corresponding special figure 1 variable display game. Is done.

  Also, in the second decorative game display section 88, a decorative special figure variable display game is executed similarly to the decorative special figure variable display game display section 85. As shown in FIG. The identification information temporarily stops in the area, and the identification information temporarily stops in the right area as shown in FIG. In the state where the vehicle is temporarily stopped, the identification information is displayed so as to fluctuate, indicating that the vehicle is not completely stopped.

  Thereafter, the middle area is temporarily stopped, and the identification information is temporarily stopped in all the variable display areas of the decorative special figure variable display game display section 85. The temporarily stopped state is the same as the state during the variable display. Thereafter, when the fluctuating time of the special figure 2 fluctuating display game ends, as shown in FIG. 91 (e), the identification information of the fancy second fancy game display unit 88 is stopped, and the result mode is displayed.

  Further, with the end of the stop time of the special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game ends. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 91 (f), the display of the second execution storage display unit 84b is deleted, and the next decorative special figure 2 variable display game can be started. Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (g), the special figure 2 variable display game is started based on the new second start memory, and the corresponding decorative special figure 2 variable display game is started in the second decorative game display section 88. . It should be noted that the same applies to the case where the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is displayed on the special figure 1 second decorative game display section 88a.

  Since the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed independently and simultaneously, the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game is also executed independently and simultaneously. If the result of one of the special figure change display games is a special result (big hit or small hit), the other special figure change display game is forcibly ended with a loss result and enters the special game state. In this case, the decoration special figure change display game is also forcibly stopped, and the result of the special figure change display game corresponding to the main display symbol in the state of FIG. 91 (f) is a special result (big hit or small hit). If so, a special result is displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85, and the decoration special figure variation display game on the second decoration game display section 88 corresponding to the sub display symbol ends with a loss result.

  In the state of FIG. 91 (e), if the result of the special figure variable display game corresponding to the sub display symbol is a special result (big hit or small hit), the special result is displayed on the second decoration game display section 88, and the main result is displayed. The decoration special figure variation display game on the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 corresponding to the display symbol ends with a loss result. In this case, after the special figure variable display game corresponding to the sub display symbol ends, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are switched, and the special result displayed on the second decorative game display section 88 is changed to the decorative special figure variable display game. After being displayed on the display section 85, a special game state is set. Thereby, the fact that the special result is derived is clearly indicated to the player. In this case, a skip effect may be performed as described with reference to FIG.

  If there is no start memory corresponding to the sub display symbol in the state of FIG. 91 (f), the special figure change display game corresponding to the sub display symbol is not executed, and the second decoration game display is performed until a new start memory is generated. The unit 88 remains displaying the result. Similarly, if there is no starting memory corresponding to the main display symbol in the state of FIG. 91 (g), the special figure variable display game corresponding to the main display symbol is not executed. In this case, if the special figure change display game corresponding to the sub display symbol is being executed, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are switched.

  Thereby, the decoration special figure variation display game currently displayed on the second decoration game display section 88 is displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85. In the second decoration game display section 88, the result displayed on the decoration special figure change display game display section 85 corresponding to the special figure changed to the sub display symbol is displayed. That is, in a situation where only one special figure variable display game is executed, the special figure variable display game to be executed is set as the main display symbol. Of course, without making such a change, the decorative special figure variation display game may be executed only by the decorative game display section 88. In the state of FIG. 91 (g), if there is no start memory corresponding to the main display symbol and the special figure change display game corresponding to the sub display symbol is not executed, a customer waiting state is set.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol can be switched by pressing the effect button 25. FIG. 92 shows an example of display on the display device 41 when the main display symbol is changed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

  FIG. 92 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 is the main display symbol and the special figure 2 is the sub display symbol, and the special figure variable display game is being executed in both the main display symbol and the sub display symbol. . In the second decoration game display section 88, the special figure variation display game is displayed only in the special figure 2 second decoration game display section 88b.

  When the player presses the effect button 25 in this state, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are switched. As a result, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), the display of the decoration special figure change display game display section 85 moves to the second decoration game display section 88, and the display of the second decoration game display section 88 changes to the decoration special figure display section. An effect of moving to the variable display game display section 85 is performed, and the displays are switched as shown in FIG. In this case, since the special figure 1 is the sub display symbol, the display of the decoration special figure change display game display section 85 moves to the special figure 1 second decoration game display section 88a. Also, since the special figure 2 is the main display symbol, the display of the special figure 2 second decoration game display section 88b moves to the decoration special figure change display game display section 85, and the special figure 2 second decoration game display section 88b displays the decoration. The special figure change display game is not displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 92 (d), the special figure 1 is the main display symbol and the special figure 2 is the sub display symbol, and the special figure variable display game is executed in both the main display symbol and the sub display symbol. This is a state in which a reach effect is performed in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. In this state, if the operation of the effect button 25 is performed during the reach effect, the display of the decorative special figure change display game display section 85 and the display of the second decorative game display section 88 as shown in FIG. Are replaced, and the reach effect is not displayed as shown in FIG. 92 (f).

  Thereafter, when the effect button 25 is operated again, the display of the decorative special figure change display game display section 85 and the display of the second decorative game display section 88 are switched as shown in FIG. In this case, since the special figure 2 is the sub display symbol, the display of the decoration special figure change display game display section 85 moves to the special figure 2 second decoration game display section 88b. Since the special figure 1 is the main display symbol, the display of the special figure 1 second decoration game display section 88a moves to the decoration special figure change display game display section 85, and the special figure 1 second decoration game display section 88a displays the decoration. The special figure change display game is not displayed. With this change, the reach effect is restarted as shown in FIG. In this case, the reach effect is not restarted from the point of interruption in FIG. 92 (e), but is restarted from the point corresponding to the progress of the special figure variable display game changed to the main display symbol.

  When the reach effect is performed and the decoration special figure change display game display section 85 is reduced in size as shown in FIG. 92 (d), the corresponding special figure display section in the second decoration game display section 88 is displayed. A decorative special figure change display game may be displayed. For example, in the case of FIG. 92 (d), since the main display symbol is the special figure 1, the decorative special figure variable display game is displayed on the special figure 1 second decorative game display section 88a instead of the decorative special figure variable display game display section 88a. It may be displayed.

  Also, when the right area is stopped in the second decoration game display section 88 and the same identification information is stopped in the left area and the right area and the reach state is reached, as shown in FIG. The display continues, but the reach effect is not displayed. In this state, when the special figure, which is the sub display symbol, is changed to the main display symbol, a corresponding reach effect is performed from the time point of the change as shown in FIG. 92 (h).

  As described above, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol can be exchanged according to the player's intention, so that the display can be made to suit the player's preference, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 93 shows an example of the skip effect. The skip effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the special figure change display game has ended based on the operation of the effect button 25. As described above, if one of the special figure variable display games ends with a special result while the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, the other special figure variable display game is forced. The process is terminated when the result is out of order. When such a forced stop is performed, a skip effect is performed to make it appear as if the player has been forcibly stopped by an operation of the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The state shown in FIG. 93A is a state where both the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are executing the special figure variable display game, and the sub display symbol ends before the main display symbol, and This is a state where the result of the sub display symbol is a special result. In this case, the special figure 1 is a main display symbol and the special figure 2 is a sub display symbol, but may be reversed. In this state, when the remaining fluctuation time of the sub display symbol reaches a predetermined time, a skip effect is started. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), in the skip effect, an instruction display 94 for instructing to press the effect button 25 is performed, and a change in the remaining time in a period (specific period) during which the effect button 25 can be operated is visually checked. An operation period display 93, which is a time bar in which a portion displayed in a specific color decreases with time, is displayed.

  When the effect button 25 is pressed, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are exchanged, and the identification information of the decorative special figure change display game display section 85 is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. Becomes That is, the decorative feature displayed on the second decorative game display section 88 (here, the special figure 2 second decorative game display section 88b) corresponding to the special figure variable display game which is the sub-display symbol in FIG. 93 (b). In FIG. 93 (c), the figure variation display game is a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the main display symbol, displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85, and temporarily stopped in the special result mode. .

  Thus, it is possible to make it appear as if the special figure change display game has ended based on the operation of the effect button 25. It should be noted that when the display of the decoration special figure change display game display section 85 and the display of the second decoration game display section 88 are exchanged, the effect showing the state of movement as shown in FIG. 92 is not performed. In b), it is possible to make it appear as if the decorative special figure change display game displayed on the decorative special figure change display game display section 85 was stopped halfway.

  At the time of FIG. 93 (c), since the fluctuation time of the special figure variable display game which is a special result has not ended, the identification information of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 is temporarily stopped, and the sub display symbol and Since the special figure variable display game corresponding to the changed special figure has not been forcibly stopped yet, the variable display is continued on the second decorative game display unit 88 (here, the special figure 1 second decorative game display unit 88a). .

  Thereafter, when the fluctuating time of the special figure fluctuating display game as a special result ends, the identification information of the decorative special figure fluctuating display game display unit 85 stops as shown in FIG. At the same time, the other special figure change display game is forcibly stopped with the result of the loss, so the second decoration game display unit 88 displays the result of the loss and stops. Thereafter, a special game state is set.

  FIGS. 93 (e) to 93 (h) show a case where the effect button 25 is not pressed in the skip effect. The skip effect ends before the end of the change time of the special figure change display game as a special result. With the end of the skip effect, the instruction display 94 or the instruction display 94 or the like is displayed as shown in FIG. The operation period display 93 ends, and a state is displayed in which the variable display is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (f), by the end of the fluctuating time of the special display fluctuating display game of the sub display symbol, which is a special result, the decoration special figure fluctuating corresponding to the special fluctuating display game of the main display symbol. The decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display game display section 85 is stopped as a result of the loss. At this time, the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 stops the identification information in the order of the left variation display area, the right variation display area, and the middle variation display area in the same manner as when displaying the normal deviation result, and deviates from the beginning. Stop as if the result was meant to stop. Actually, the special figure variable display game of the main display symbol is forcibly stopped due to the loss result due to the end of the variable time of the special figure variable display game of the special display symbol which is a special result, but the forced stop is clearly described. It stops so that it does not show.

  Then, during the stop time of the special figure variation display game, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are switched as shown in FIG. 93 (g) to display the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85 and the second decoration game display section 88. Are exchanged, the special result is displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85 as shown in FIG. 93 (h), and the mode shifts to the special game state.

  Note that both the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are in execution of the special figure variable display game, the sub display symbol ends earlier than the main display symbol, and the result of the sub display symbol is a special result. However, if the execution condition of the skip effect is not satisfied, the display as shown in FIGS. 93 (e) to 93 (h) is performed without performing the skip effect.

  FIG. 94 shows a time chart when the skip effect shown in FIG. 93 is executed. Note that the main display symbols and effects are shown when the effect button 25 is pressed in the skip effect in the upper part (FIGS. 93 (c) and (d)), and the effect button 25 is not pressed in the skip effect in the lower part. (FIGS. 93 (e) to (h)).

  Here, first, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure 2 variable display game is a special result and ends before the special figure 1 variable display game. It has become. In the state where the main variable symbol is the special figure 1 variable display game and the sub variable symbol is the special figure 2 variable display game, when the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game as a special result reaches a predetermined time, a skip is performed. An effect is started (t11). This predetermined time is 3000 ms, which is the maximum execution time (t11 to t13) of the skip effect, and when the effect button is not pressed in the skip effect, the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 stops the identification information due to a deviation result. The time (4000 ms) combined with the time (1000 ms) required for performing the operation (t13 to t14).

  When the skip effect (specific period) is started, a press instruction effect for displaying the instruction display 94 and the operation period display 93 is started (t11, FIG. 93 (b)). Then, when the effect button 25 is pressed in the skip effect (t12), the main fluctuation symbol and the sub fluctuation symbol are exchanged, and the decoration special figure fluctuation display corresponding to the main fluctuation symbol is displayed on the game display section 85. The game is temporarily stopped, and the skip effect is terminated (FIG. 93 (c)). The temporary stop state continues until the special figure 2 variable display game stops with a special result (t14).

  Thereafter, as the special figure 2 variable display game stops with a special result, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disconnection result even if the scheduled fluctuation time (until t17) has not been reached. (T14, FIG. 93 (d)). The decoration special figure change display game display section 85 ends the temporarily stopped state, and displays the identification information in a stop state over the stop time of the special figure change display game (t14 to t16). In addition, the second decoration game display unit 88 stops and displays the outlier result corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game which has become the secondary variable symbol. Then, the special game state is started with the end of the stop time (t16).

  On the other hand, if the effect button 25 is not pressed in the skip effect, the skip effect (specific period) ends with the end of the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t13, FIG. 93 (e)), and the decoration special figure fluctuation display A fluctuation effect for stopping the fluctuation display on the game display unit 85 is performed (t13 to t14). In this fluctuation effect, the identification information is stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, as in the case of displaying the normal loss result.

  Then, with the start of the stop time of the special figure variation display game, the deviation result is stopped and displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85, and the special result is displayed on the second decoration game display section 88 (t14, FIG. 93). (F)). Thereafter, the display on the decorative special figure change display game display section 85 and the display on the second decorative game display section 88 are switched (t15, FIG. 93 (g)), and the special result stops on the decorative special figure change display game display section 85. The result is displayed, and the second decoration game display section 88 is in a state in which the deviation result is displayed. Then, the special game state is started with the end of the stop time (t16).

  It should be noted that the deviation result is stopped and displayed on the decoration special figure change display game display section 85, and the time (t14 to t15) for displaying the special result on the second decoration game display section 88 is shifted on the special figure change display game display section 85. If the time is the same as the time for displaying the result, it is possible to give an impression that the result is a missed result, and the interest when the result is indicated as a special result is improved. In addition, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the special result changes even when the special figure change display game of the deviation result is actually ended.

  Further, in the skip effect, when the display of the decorative special figure change display game display section 85 and the display of the second decorative game display section 88 are exchanged, an effect showing the state of movement as shown in FIG. 92 is not performed. However, an effect indicating the state of movement may be performed to indicate that the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the sub display symbol has stopped. In addition, when the temporary stop is performed in response to the pressing of the effect button 25, the display of the decorative special figure change display game display section 85 and the display of the second decorative game display section 88 are not switched, and the display of the decorative special figure change display game display section 85 is performed. The result may be temporarily stopped, and then the display of the decorative special figure variation display game display section 85 and the display of the second decorative game display section 88 may be switched.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), after temporarily stopping the special result in the decoration special figure change display game display unit 85, a fanfare effect at the start of the special game state is performed before the special figure change display game ends. May be. In this case, the temporary stop time may be set to be the same as the stop time when the result of the special figure change display game is a special result.

  Although FIGS. 93 and 94 show the case where the result is a big hit, the skip effect can be similarly executed when the result is a small hit. In this case, the result mode displayed on the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 as a result of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game that is a small hit may be a result mode indicating a small hit, It may be a result mode indicating a loss.

[Main processing]
In order to control the display on the display device 41 as described above, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 95 and a timer interrupt process (not shown). In the main process, first, the process at the time of starting the program is performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interruption is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

  After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, a loop process is performed as a main loop process. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on an operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process. In the effect button input process, processing when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed.

  Then, a hall / player setting mode process for setting a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and the like and accepting an operation by the player to change the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating random numbers for determining details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

  Next, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100, and effect display editing process (step C13) for editing settings for controlling the progress of the effect and drawing commands. ) To set the preparation end of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and the processing is performed until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1/30 second for one frame), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is input twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image update (frame switching) may be performed in 1/60 second, or the image updating (frame switching) may be performed later than 1/60 second. Switching). If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that the current time is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), an instruction to draw a screen is issued (step C16).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling the output of the sound from the speakers (the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C17) for controlling the LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like. C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed. Then, a skip effect process for performing a process related to the skip effect is performed (step C19), a display switching process for switching between the main variable symbol and the sub-variable symbol is performed (step C20), and the process of clearing the WDT (step C8) is performed. Return.

[Skip production processing]
FIG. 96 shows a skip effect process (step C19) in the main process described above. In the skip effect process, first, it is determined whether there is a skip effect flag set during the execution of the skip effect (step C41). If there is a skip effect flag (step C41; Y), that is, if a skip effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step C49. When there is no skip effect flag (step C41; N), it is determined whether the simultaneous change is being performed, that is, whether both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are performing the variable display. (Step C42).

  If it is not during the simultaneous fluctuation (step C42; N), the skip effect process ends. In this case, no skip effect is set. In addition, when simultaneous fluctuation is being performed (step C42; Y), it is determined whether or not the sub display symbol is a hit (step C43). Here, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variable display game of the special figure currently set as the sub display symbol is a hit. The hit includes both a big hit and a small hit, but only one of them may be used.

  If the sub display symbol does not win (step C43; N), the skip effect process ends. If the sub-display symbol is a hit (step C43; Y), it is determined whether the sub-display symbol stops first (step C44). Here, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure of the main fluctuation pattern and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure of the sub fluctuation pattern are compared, and the special figure of the special figure of the sub fluctuation pattern is compared. It is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time of the figure fluctuation display game is shorter. That is, it is determined whether or not the special figure variable display game of the special figure of the secondary variable symbol to be a win is ended first and the special figure variable display game of the special figure of the main variable symbol is forcibly stopped as a result of a loss.

  If the sub display symbol does not stop first (step C44; N), the skip effect process ends. When the sub-display symbol stops first (step C44; Y), it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is a predetermined time (step C45). Here, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure of the sub fluctuation pattern is referred to, and it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is a predetermined time. This predetermined time is, as shown in FIG. 94, 3000 ms, which is the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t11 to t13 in FIG. 94), and a decorative special figure change display game when the effect button is not pressed in the skip effect. The display unit 85 is a time (4000 ms) obtained by adding 1000 ms which is a time (t13 to t14 in FIG. 94) required to stop the identification information due to the deviation result.

  If the remaining fluctuation time is not the predetermined time (step C45; N), the skip effect processing ends. If the remaining fluctuation time is a predetermined time (step C45; Y), a skip effect is set (step C46). Thus, a press instruction effect for displaying the instruction display 94 and the operation period display 93 is started. Next, a skip effect flag is set (step C47), and an initial value is set in the skip effect timer (step C48). The initial value set here is a value corresponding to the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t11 to t13 in FIG. 94).

  Thereafter, if the skip effect timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C49), and it is determined whether the skip effect timer has become 0 (step C50). If the skip effect timer has not become 0 (step C50; N), the skip effect process ends. If the skip effect timer has reached 0 (step C50; Y), that is, if the maximum execution time has elapsed without pressing the effect button 25 in the skip effect, the skip effect is terminated (step C51). The skip effect flag is cleared (step C52), and the skip effect process ends.

(Display switching process)
FIG. 97 shows the display switching process (step C20) in the above-described main process. In this display switching process, first, it is determined whether a switching operation between the main display symbol and the sub display symbol has been performed (step C61). Here, the switching operation is a single press of the effect button 25, but the operation mode of the switching operation can be arbitrarily set. Further, it is also possible to operate the touch panel 29.

  If the switching operation has been performed (step C61; N), it is determined whether the simultaneous change is being performed, that is, whether both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are performing the variable display (step C61). C62).

  If not simultaneously changing (step C62; N), the display switching process ends. Further, when the simultaneous fluctuation is being performed (step C62; Y), it is determined whether or not there is a switching permission flag (step C63). The switching permission flag is a flag that is set in a state where the main display symbol and the sub-display symbol can be switched according to the switching operation. If the switching permission flag does not exist (step C63; N), the display switching process ends. If there is a switching permission flag (step C63; Y), it is determined whether there is a skip effect flag set during execution of the skip effect (step C64).

  If there is no skip effect flag (step C64; N), the main display symbol is changed (step C70), the effect at the time of switching is set (step C71), and the display switching process ends. Thus, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are switched, and the effect at the time of switching as shown in FIG. 92 is performed.

  On the other hand, if there is a skip effect flag (step C64; Y), that is, if the skip effect is being executed, the main display symbol is changed and the changed main display symbol is temporarily stopped (step C65). As a result, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), the decoration special figure variation display displayed on the second decoration game display unit 88 corresponding to the special figure variation display game of the special figure which was the sub display symbol. The game is displayed on the decoration special figure change display game display section 85, and the result is temporarily stopped.

  Thereafter, the switching permission flag is cleared (step C66), the skip effect flag is cleared (step C67), the skip effect timer is cleared (step C68), and the display switching process ends. By clearing the switching permission flag, the state in which the result is temporarily stopped in the decorative special figure variation display game display section 85 is maintained, and it is possible to make it appear as if the game is ended and the result mode is displayed. In addition, by clearing the skip effect flag and the skip effect timer, the skip effect ends. The switching permission flag is set again at the start of a new special figure change display game.

  When there is no switching operation (Step C61; N), it is determined whether the switching condition is satisfied (Step C69). Here, the switching condition is a state in which the special figure variable display game of the main display symbol is not executed and only the special figure variable display game of the sub display symbol is executed, or the special figure variable display of the sub display symbol is performed. For example, establishment of conditions relating to the progress of the game, such as when the game has a special result, may be mentioned. Of course, other conditions may be used. For example, there is a case where only the sub-display symbols are in the reach state. If the switching condition is not satisfied (step C69; N), the display switching process ends. When the switching condition is satisfied (step C69; Y), the main display symbol is changed (step C70), the effect at the time of switching is set (step C71), and the display switching process is ended.

  In the skip effect process shown in FIG. 96, steps C42 to C45 have been described as conditions for setting the skip effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a lottery may be performed to determine whether to execute a skip effect. In addition, the condition that the reach effect or the specific effect is not executed in the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the main variable symbol may be used as the condition for setting the skip effect. Further, when one of the main fluctuation symbol and the sub fluctuation symbol becomes a hit, a skip effect may be performed by forcibly changing the winning special figure to the sub fluctuation symbol.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the case where the sub display symbol is a hit, and may be configured to be able to execute a skip effect when the main display symbol is a hit and stops before the sub display symbol. In this case, a skip effect may be performed even if the result of the main display symbol is out of place, or the skip effect may be executable when a variation pattern without reach is selected. In the skip effect, the result is temporarily stopped immediately in response to the operation of the effect button 25. However, the identification information may be sequentially stopped within a predetermined time in response to the operation of the effect button 25. That is, the effect may be as if the fluctuation time was shortened.

  Further, basically, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol can always be exchanged, but may be exchanged only when the skip effect is executed. Further, the setting of the main display symbol can be arbitrarily determined. For example, when turning on the power with RAM clear, the special figure 1 is set. However, if the change of the special figure 2 is started first after that, only the special figure 2 is changed, so that the main display symbol is changed to the special figure 2. After the end of the special game state, the special display that derives the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state is set as the main display symbol.

  In addition, when the reach state is started in the decorative special figure change display game of the second decorative game display section 88, the main variable symbol and the sub variable symbol may be automatically switched. In this case, a condition may be used to change that the decorative special figure variable display game in the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 is not in the reach state. Further, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol may be compared with each other in a variation pattern, and the one having a higher possibility of a special result may be set as the main display symbol. In this case, when one of the special results is obtained, the special figure change display game that is the special result may be used as the main display symbol regardless of the change pattern, or the special figure change display that is the special result may be performed. The execution of a skip effect may be made possible by using the game as a sub display symbol.

  Further, the display mode on the display device 41 is not limited to the above. For example, in the present embodiment, the display of the decorative special figure change display game display section 85 corresponding to the main display symbol is displayed larger than the display of the second decorative game display section 88 corresponding to the sub display symbol. As shown in (a), both may be displayed in the same size, or the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the sub display symbol may not be displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the main display symbol and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the sub display symbol may be displayed in a superimposed manner. In this case, a part may be overlapped or the whole may be overlapped. In addition, the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the main display symbol is displayed so as to overlap the front of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the sub display symbol.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the color of the identification information of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the main display symbol and the color of the identification information of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the sub display symbol are different. It is good. Here, the color of the identification information of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the sub-display symbol positioned behind is made lighter than the color of the identification information of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the main display symbol. In addition, the identification information itself may be different between the main display symbol and the sub display symbol.

  In addition, the reach effect is performed only for the decoration special figure variable display game corresponding to the main display symbol, but when the reach state is reached in both the main display symbol and the sub display symbol, both reach effects are displayed. You may do it. In this case, as shown in FIG. 98C, the screen may be divided so that the reach effect can be executed on both sides, or both reach effects may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

  Alternatively, both reach effects may be integrated to show the results of both special figure change display games in a single story effect. For example, as shown in FIGS. 98 (d) to (g), in the battle effect of fighting with the enemy character, the result of the battle is derived in synchronization with the result of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change display game is executed. The result may be shown.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (d), a reach effect in which both reach effects are integrated is started based on the reach state in both special figure change display games. Here, the special figure change display game of the main display symbol is ended first. In FIG. 98 (d), the battle corresponding to this special figure change display game is started as the first game, and FIG. 98 (e) The result is displayed as shown in. The result of this special figure change display game is a loss result, and the result of the battle is a draw.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 98 (f), a battle corresponding to the special display variable display game of the sub display symbol is started as the second game, and the result is displayed as shown in FIG. 98 (g). The result of the special figure change display game is a special result, and the result of the battle is that the ally character wins. Note that such an effect is not limited to the case where both are in the reach state, and can be executed even when one or both are not in the reach state. In the examples shown in FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (g) as well, the display portions of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in the decorative special figure variation display game display section 85 and the second decorative game display section 88 are different. Or may not be different.

  From the above, a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on a winning in the starting winning prize mouth is executed, and when a result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is set. In the generated gaming machine, a first start winning opening 36 and a second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 37, second start winning opening 97) are provided as start winning openings, and the first start winning opening is provided. First variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a first variable display game as a variable display game based on a game ball winning, and variable display based on a game ball winning a second starting winning opening. A second variable display game execution control unit (game control device 100) capable of executing a second variable display game as a game, a display device 41 capable of displaying an effect related to a game, and an effect control unit (a game control unit) for controlling an effect of a game. Output control device 300), the first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time, and the effect control means includes one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game. The game is mainly displayed on the display device 41, and the variable display game to be mainly displayed can be changed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. Therefore, a special figure change display game which is mainly displayed by a player in a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing different special figure change display games can be selected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, the predetermined condition is satisfied, in addition to the operation of the operation means (the effect button 25, the touch panel 29) which can be operated by the player, the special display variable display game of the main display symbol is not executed, and the sub display is performed. For example, a condition in which only the special figure variable display game of the symbol is executed or a special result of the special display variable display game of the sub-display symbol has a special result is satisfied, and the condition regarding the progress of the game is satisfied. Of course, other conditions may be used. For example, there is a case where only the sub-display symbols are in the reach state.

  In addition, a distribution means (winning device 90) for alternately distributing the game balls flowing into the predetermined inflow port 91 to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening is provided. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed at the same time, and the interest of the game can be improved by allowing the player to select the special figure variable display game to be mainly displayed.

  The first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) performs the execution control by the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) when performing the execution control of the first variable display game. When the second variable display game being played has the special result, it is possible to end the first variable display game that is performing the execution control as a result other than the special result. The execution control means, when performing the execution control of the second variable display game, performing a special result in the first variable display game for which the execution control is performed by the first variable display game execution control means, It is possible to end the second variable display game that is performing the execution control as a result other than the special result, and the effect control means (the effect control device 300) controls the first variable display game. And the second variable display game are executed simultaneously, and if the result of the variable display game for which the result is derived first is a special result, the result is obtained in the variable display game for which the result is derived first. During a specific period set from a predetermined time before the timing at which the result is derived to a timing at which the result is derived, it is possible to change the variable display game mainly displayed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. Therefore, when the result of the one special figure change display game is derived, the special figure change display game that is mainly displayed by the player can be selected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) temporarily sets the identification information corresponding to the variable display game to be mainly displayed after the change based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition in the specific period. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect as if the special figure variable display game was stopped based on the operation of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The effect control means (effect control device 300), when changing the variable display game to be displayed mainly based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition in the specific period, mainly displays the variable display game at least until the end of the variable display game. Change is prohibited. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect as if the special figure variable display game was stopped based on the operation of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the output mode of the symbol determination signal will be described. The symbol determination signal is output to an external device outside the gaming machine 10 when the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game is stopped. The external device can grasp that the special figure change display game is stopped and the result is derived based on the symbol determination signal.

  FIG. 99 shows an example of the output mode of the symbol confirmation signal. As shown in FIG. 99 (a), the output of the symbol determination signal is started based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game is changed from the state of the variable display game to the state of the stop (t31). Here, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is an outlier, 600 ms is set as the stop time (t31 to t34). The stop time of the special figure variable display game is 600 ms in the case of a loss and the case of a big hit in any of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game if the final change is not high probability. The display time is set to 2000 ms, and for a small hit, 600 ms. In the case of the high probability final fluctuation, a display time of 2000 ms is set regardless of the result.

  The symbol determination signal is turned on when the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped (t31), and is turned off after the on state is continued for 128 ms (t32). Then, the output ends after the OFF state is continued for 64 ms (t33). After the output ends, the OFF state is continued. The time required for one output of the symbol determination signal is 192 ms, and the output is completed within the stop time regardless of the time selected as the stop time of the special figure change display game.

  Similarly, when the special figure 2 variable display game is changed from the state in which the variable display game is changed to the stopped state, the output of the symbol determination signal is started based on the stopped state (t35). In this case as well, the symbol determination signal is turned on (t35) with the stop of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is turned off after continuing the on state for 128 ms (t36). Then, the output ends after the OFF state is continued for 64 ms (t37). After the output ends, the OFF state is continued.

  FIG. 99 (b) shows a case where the other special figure fluctuation display game is stopped while the symbol determination signal for the previously stopped special figure fluctuation display game is being output. In this example, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped first (t41). Based on this, a symbol confirmation signal is output (t41 to t44). During the output of the symbol determination signal, the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped (t42). In this case, since the symbol determination signal for the special figure 1 variable display game is being output, the output of the symbol determination signal for the special figure 2 variable display game is in a standby state. Then, when the output of the symbol determination signal for the special figure 1 variable display game ends, the output of the symbol determination signal for the special figure 2 variable display game starts (t44). The symbol determination signal is output twice consecutively. However, since one symbol determination signal lasts in the OFF state period (for example, t43 to t44), the external device outputs the symbol determination signal twice. Each can be detected independently.

  Here, the case where the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped first is shown, but the same applies to the case where the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped first. Also, when the other special figure variation display game is stopped during the OFF state (for example, from t43 to t44) while the symbol determination signal is being output, a new symbol determination signal is output after the end of the OFF state period. Is started.

  In FIG. 99 (c), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed, and the special figure variable display game is based on a special result derived in one special figure variable display game. The case where the display game was forcibly stopped as a result of a loss is shown. Also in this case, two symbol determination signals are continuously output.

  In this example, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game (t51). Based on this, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the loss (t51). The result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit that makes a special result, and 2000 ms is set as the stop time (t51 to t57), and after the stop time ends, the special game state is started (t57 to). In addition, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is an outlier, 600 ms is set as the stop time (t51 to t56).

  The first output of the symbol determination signal is started based on the stop of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (t51). Then, when the output of the first symbol confirmation signal is completed, the second output is started (t53). The output of the two symbol determination signals is completed within the stop time of the special figure 2 variable display game that has resulted in the special result. Thus, it is possible to prevent the output of the symbol determination signal from being performed during the special game state, and to prevent the external device from grasping as if the special figure change display game was stopped during the special game state.

  In addition, one big hit signal, two big hit signals, three big hit signals, and four big hit signals can be output to the external device as external information relating to the special game state. The big hit 1 signal is output during the first special game state based on the big hit and the second special game state based on the small hits 1 to 4 (turned on). The big hit 2 signal is output during the first special game state and is not output during the second special game state. However, if the first special game state based on the 2R certainty change D1 that occurred in the low probability state is set to OFF. The two big hit signals are also output when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in a time saving operation state (under normal power support). That is, the specific information is output in the specific game state. In this case, the specific game state is set to the high probability state and the time saving state, but may be a state in which only one of them is generated. Even in this case, two big hit signals are output during the specific game state. Is also good.

  The big hit 3 signal is output during the first special game state and is not output during the second special game state. In addition, it is set to OFF when it is the first special game state based on the 2R certainty change D1 generated in the high probability state. The big hit 4 signal is not output during the first special game state, and is output during the second special game state. The external device grasps the presence / absence of the execution of the special game state, the type thereof, and the presence / absence of the time reduction state based on one big hit signal, two big hit signals, three big hit signals and four big hit signals, and displays information.

  In this example, the special result is derived and the special game state is started in a state where the time is not the time reduction state. Before the start of the special game state, the big hits 1 to 4 signals are in the OFF state, and the special game state is started. Then, the big hits 1 to 4 signals are turned on (t57). Based on this, the external device can recognize that it is in the special game state. Therefore, the output of the symbol determination signal is ended before the external device is in the special game state by any of the jackpots 1 to 4 signals. In other words, it can be said that until the output of the symbol determination signal ends, the output of information (big hits 1 to 4 signals) for grasping that the external device is in the special game state is on standby.

  Note that the external device determines that the special figure variation display game has stopped and the result has been derived based on the change of the symbol determination signal to the ON state (rising edge of the signal). (T53) may be performed within the stop time or before the external device recognizes that the external device is in the special game state by any of the big hits 1 to 4 signals.

  FIG. 100 shows an output mode of information output to the outside at the end of the time saving state. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is set in a high probability state and a time saving state from the end of the special gaming state to the 50th special figure change display game. As shown in FIG. 100 (a), the special figure 2 is the 48th special figure change display game from the end of the special game state. The one-variation display game has been started (t61). Thereafter, the special figure 2 variable display game is started as the 50th special figure variable display game (t62).

  Here, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability state is set to the low probability at the end of the 50th special figure variable display game. If the state is changed, the determination is made in a high probability state even to the other special figure change display game that is started during execution of the one special figure change display game, and the high probability change is performed over 50 times. The game can be executed in the state. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be simultaneously executed as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, after the 50th special figure variable display game is determined in the high probability state, It is necessary to keep the low probability state by the start of the next special figure change display game, and here, the 50th special figure change display game is changed to the low probability state immediately after the start processing is completed. (T62).

  With the end of the high probability state and the time reduction state, the test signal indicating the gaming state changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and changes to the state indicating the low probability state and the no time reduction state (t62). Specifically, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 change time reduction state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 change time reduction state signal is set to OFF. The test signal is used to make it possible to grasp the game state with the test shooting test device at the time of testing the gaming machine, and the output state changes according to the change in the actual game state.

  On the other hand, the big hit 2 signal that can be turned on in the time saving state or the special game state is kept on until the end of the 50th special figure fluctuation display game, and then turned off. (T64). The jackpots 1 to 4 signals are for enabling information relating to the game to be collected and displayed on an external device provided in the game store, and have an output mode adapted to the display on the external device.

  An information display device provided above the gaming machine as one of the external devices displays information such as the number of times the special figure change display game is executed and the number of times the special result is derived based on the jackpot 1 to 4 signals, the symbol confirmation signal, and the like. Like that. In this information display device, a hit in a state that is not the time saving state is set as an initial hit, and the time saving state including the initial hit is ended by executing a predetermined number of special figure change display games from the initial hit and becomes a normal gaming state. It is possible to display the number of big hits up to the number of consecutive games, but it is more convenient to display the number of big games by turning the two signals into the ON state until the end of the 50th special figure change display game, which is the predetermined number. Is good.

  FIG. 100 (b) shows a case where the 50th special figure change display game has a special result. From the end of the special game state to the start of the 50th special figure fluctuation display game, the game state is in the high probability state and the time saving state (t72). In this state, the big hit 2 signal is turned on to indicate the time saving state, and the test signal is also turned on to indicate the high probability state and the time saving state. The jackpot 1, 3, and 4 signals that can be turned on during the special game state are in the off state.

  Then, when the 50th special figure fluctuation display game is started, the gaming state is set to the low probability state and the no time reduction state (t72). Accordingly, the test signal is turned off, but the two big hit signals are kept on. During the execution of the 50th special figure change display game, the 51st special figure change display game is started (t73), but the special figure change display game is determined in a low probability state.

  Thereafter, a special result is derived in the 50th special figure change display game (t74). Along with the derivation of the special result, the 51st special figure change display game, which is the other special figure change display game, is forcibly stopped with the result of the loss. In addition, as the special result is derived in the 50th special figure change display game, the symbols corresponding to the 50th special figure change display game and the 51st special figure change display game forcibly stopped are displayed. A decision signal is output (t74, t75).

  The external device recognizes the stop of the special figure change display game based on the symbol determination signal, and determines that the special figure change display game is stopped during the time saving state because the two big hits are in the ON state. After that, the big hits 1, 3, and 4 signals are turned on with the start of the special game state, so that the external device also knows that the special game state has started. At this time, as described above, since it is determined that the special figure fluctuation display game that has been completed immediately before is in the time saving state, it is determined that the current big hit is a long-run big hit, and the number of long-plays is added. I do.

  During the execution of the 50th special figure change display game, an effect to the effect that this is the last special figure change display game in a high probability state is being performed, and a big hit has occurred in this special figure change display game. In such a case, it is normal for the player to recognize that the mansion is a big hit, and the recognition of the player and the display on the information display device can be matched. Assuming that the two big hits change according to the game state like the test signal, the information display device is in a state indicating that there is no time saving at the end of the 50th special figure change display game. In this case, the display is performed as the first hit, and the display is different from the recognition of the player, and the interest of the game is reduced.

  By changing the two signals of the big hit as in the present embodiment, in the example of FIG. 100 (b), the special figure change display game that is completed during the execution of the 50th special figure change display game (here, the 49th change display game) (Special figure change display game) has a special result, it is possible to treat it as an extended-game jackpot. Also, in the effect control device 300, if the result is a special result for the 50th special figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game that is ended during the execution of the 50th special figure fluctuation display game, Treat it as a villa hit.

  From the above, a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on a winning in the starting winning prize mouth is executed, and when a result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is set. In the generated gaming machine, a first starting winning opening 36 and a second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97) are provided as the starting winning opening, and the first starting winning opening 36 is provided. The first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing the first variable display game as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball, and the variable based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening. A second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a second variable display game as a display game, and an output means (game control device 100) for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine, First The moving display game and the second variable display game can be executed simultaneously, and the first variable display game execution control means controls the execution of the first variable display game by the second variable display game execution control means. When the second variable display game for which the execution control is being performed has a special result, forced stop control for stopping the first variable display game for which the execution control is performed as a result other than the special result is possible, The second variable display game execution control means, when performing the execution control of the second variable display game, determines that the first variable display game whose execution control is performed by the first variable display game execution control means a special result. If the variable display game is not executed, the second variable display game that is performing the execution control can be forcibly stopped as a result other than the special result. Stop information can be output to the outside in response to the stop, and when the forced stop control is performed, the first change display game and the second change display game are started before the start of the special game state based on the derivation of the special result. This means that stop information corresponding to each of the display games is output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience in grasping information by the external device.

  In addition, a specific game state generating means (game control device 100) for generating a specific game state for a period until the predetermined number of variable display games is executed after the end of the special game state is provided, and the output means is in the specific game state. In this case, the specific information can be output to the outside, the specific game state generating means ends the specific game state with the start of the predetermined number of variable display games, and the output means outputs the predetermined number of variable display games. As a result, the output of the specific information ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience in grasping information by the external device.

  In the above-described embodiment, the high-probability state and the time-saving state are terminated at the start of the 50th special-figure variation display game. The state may be ended at the end of the 50th special figure change display game. The two big hit signals constituting the specific information may be set to the ON state in the time saving state, and may be set to the OFF state in the no time saving state. By doing so, similarly to the case shown in FIG. 100, the special figure change display game which is terminated during the 50th special figure change display game or the 50th special figure change display game is executed on the external device. Even in the case of a result, it is possible to treat it as a republic hit.

  That is, the normal variable prize device 37 and the normal variable prize device 37, which can be converted into a closed state where the game ball is hard to win or cannot be won, and an open state where the game ball can easily win or win than the closed state. An operation control means (game control device 100) for controlling the operation state in one of a normal operation state and a time-saving operation state in which a prize is easier than the normal operation state; A specific game state generating means (game control device 100) for generating a specific game state over a period until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed, and a period until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed after the end of the special game state Probabilistic setting means capable of setting the probability that the result of the variable display game is a special result to a high probability state higher than the normal probability state. The high-probability state is set with the start of the skill state, and the normal-probability state is set with the start of the variable display game for the predetermined number of times. May be started to shift to the normal operation state based on the end of the predetermined number of times of the variable display game in which the specific game state ends.

  Next, monitoring of an out-number error based on detection of a game ball by the out switch 98 will be described. The out switch 98 is a sensor that detects a safe ball that has won each winning opening and an out ball that is discharged from the out opening 30a without winning each winning opening. That is, all the game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and have finished the game are detected. An out-number error is monitored based on the number of game balls detected by the out switch 98 and the number of game balls detected at each winning opening.

  Specifically, when the number of game balls detected at each winning opening is greater than the number of game balls detected by the out switch 98 by a predetermined number or more, it is determined that an out-number error has occurred. The number of game balls detected by the out switch 98 is the total number of out balls and safe balls, and the number of game balls detected at each winning opening is the number of safe balls. Therefore, normally, the number of game balls detected at each winning opening rarely exceeds the number of game balls detected by the out switch 98, and if it exceeds, it is assumed that there is an abnormality. However, the number of game balls detected at each winning opening may exceed the number of game balls detected by the out switch 98 due to the timing of detection, the timing of resetting a counter that holds the number of detections, and the like. When the number has exceeded a predetermined number, it is determined that an out-number error has occurred.

  When such an out-number error occurs, a wrongdoing by a line fishing ball is assumed. The fraudulent act by a line fishing ball is an act of causing a game sensor or a metal piece with a line to penetrate into a winning opening and operating the line to illegally generate a detection by a winning sensor. When such misconduct is performed, only the number of game balls detected at the winning opening increases, so that the number of game balls detected by the out switch 98 may exceed the number of game balls detected.

[Status display edit output processing]
FIG. 101 shows the status display edit output process (step X116) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this state display editing output processing, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the out switch (step X801). If there is no input to the out switch (step X801; N), the process proceeds to step X809. If there is an input to the out switch (step X801; Y), the value of the out counter area is loaded (step X802), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X803), and it is determined whether an overflow occurs (step X803). Step X804).

  If no overflow has occurred (step X804; N), the updated value is saved in the out counter area (step X805). Thereby, the game balls discharged from the gaming machine are counted, and the counting result is held. That is, the game control device 100 forms a total discharge number counter (out counter) for counting the number of detections by the discharge sensor (out switch 98). Thereafter, a difference calculation process for calculating a difference necessary for the determination of the out-number error is performed (step X806), and the flow shifts to step X809.

  If an overflow has occurred (step X804; Y), the value of the difference counter area is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X807), and 0 is saved in the out counter area (step X808), and step X809 is executed. Move to The difference counter area is an area for storing the value of the difference calculated in the difference calculation process, and the total winning number counter area is an area for storing the total number of gaming balls that have won each winning opening. When the value of the out counter area overflows, the values of the total winning number counter area and the out counter area are set as described above. Note that the value of the difference counter area is maintained. As a result, there is no inconvenience in detecting the out-number error.

  Thereafter, a base value calculation process of calculating a base value from the number of game balls detected by the out switch 98 and the number of payouts based on winning in the prize area is performed (step X809), and an out number error monitor for monitoring an out number error. The process is performed (step X810), and the status display edit output process ends.

[Difference calculation processing]
FIG. 102 shows the difference calculation processing (steps X365 and X806) in the winning number counter update processing and the status display editing output processing described above. In this difference calculation process, first, the value of the out counter area is loaded (step X821), the value of the total winning number counter area is loaded (step X822), and the difference is calculated (step X823). In calculating the difference, a value obtained by subtracting the value of the out counter area from the value of the total winning number counter area is calculated to be the difference. However, when the calculation result is less than 0, the calculated difference may be treated as being 0.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated difference is larger than the value of the difference counter area (Step X824). If the calculated difference is larger than the value in the difference counter area (step X824; Y), the calculated difference is saved in the difference counter area (step X825), and the difference calculation processing ends. If the calculated difference is not larger than the value in the difference counter area (step X824; N), the difference calculation processing ends without saving the calculated difference in the difference counter area. Therefore, the maximum value of the difference is held in the difference counter area. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a calculating means for calculating the difference number in which the value of the total winning number counter exceeds the value of the total discharge number counter, and the difference capable of holding the difference number calculated by the calculating means. Make a counter.

[Out number error monitoring processing]
FIG. 103 shows the out-number error monitoring process (step X810) in the above-described status display editing output process. In this out-number error monitoring process, first, the value of the difference counter area is loaded (step X841), and it is determined whether the value of the difference counter area is larger than the out-number error occurrence determination number (here, 13) (step X842). ).

  The number of out-number error occurrence determinations can be set to an arbitrary value, but is larger than the number of wins (for example, 10) that is a condition for ending a round in consideration of a special game state in which continuous winnings are most likely to occur. It is preferable that the value be set to a value having a margin larger than the number of winnings, which is a condition for ending the round, in consideration of simultaneously winning other holes. In addition to this, it is preferable to set a value with a margin in consideration of the time from winning to detection by the out switch 98 and the possibility of erroneous recognition of the detection signal due to noise. In the present embodiment, the out-number error occurrence determination number is set to 13 in consideration of these.

  If the value of the difference counter area is larger than the number of out-number error occurrence determinations (step X842; Y), that is, if it is determined that an out-number error has occurred, the value of the difference counter area is limited to the number of out-number error occurrence determinations. (Step X843) The initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the out-number error notification timer area (Step X844). Next, an out number error occurrence command is prepared (step X845), an out number error occurrence flag is prepared as an invalid flag (step X846), and the prepared invalid flag is compared with the value of the out number error occurrence flag area (step X846). Step X853).

  On the other hand, if the value of the difference counter area is not larger than the number of out-number error occurrence determinations (step X842; N), that is, if no out-number error has occurred, unless the out-number error notification timer is 0, -1 is updated. (Step X847). Note that the minimum value of the out-number error notification timer is set to 0.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the out number error notification timer is 0 (step X848). If the value is not 0 (step X848; N), that is, if the time is not up, the out number error monitoring process ends. I do. If the value is 0 (step X848; Y), that is, if the time has elapsed or the time has already elapsed, an out number error release command is prepared (step X849), and the out number error release flag is set as an invalid flag. Is prepared (step X850). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the out number error notification timer becomes 0 (step X851).

  If it is the moment when the value of the out-number error notification timer becomes 0 (Step X851; Y), that is, if the value of the out-number error notification timer becomes 0 in the current out-number error monitoring process, the difference counter area Is cleared (step X852), and the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the out-number error flag area (step X853). If the value of the out-number error notification timer has not become zero at the moment when the value of the out-number error notification timer has become zero (step X851; N), that is, if the value of the out-number error notification timer has become zero in the previous out-number error monitoring process, The invalid flag thus obtained is compared with the value of the out-number error flag area (step X853).

  When the prepared invalid flag matches the value of the out-number error flag area (step X853; Y), the out-number error monitoring process ends. If the prepared invalid flag does not match the value of the out-number error flag area (step X853; N), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the out-number error flag area (step X854), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step X855), the out number error monitoring process ends. With the above processing, the out-number error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the out-number error occurs, and the out-number error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the out-number error is released. The start and end of the error notification are set. That is, the game control device 100 sets the winning detection sensors (starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, starting opening 3 switch 97a, upper winning opening switch 38a, lower winning opening switch 39a, winning opening switch 35a) and discharging. The control means performs control based on a detection signal from the sensor (out switch 98).

  FIG. 104 shows an example of a change in a value in each counter area for detecting an out-number error. The total winning number counter area, the out counter area, and the difference counter area are areas provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and are cleared by turning on the power with the RAM clear, and the values are changed as shown in a1 of FIG. Set to 0. In the case of power-on without RAM clear, the value at power-off is maintained. However, in this case, the value may be cleared.

  Then, the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from any winning opening (a2), and the difference is calculated accordingly. Here, since the value of the out counter area is 0, the difference is 1, and since it is larger than 0, which is the value of the difference counter area before updating, 1 is set in the difference counter area.

  Thereafter, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98 (a3). Since the out switch 98 also detects a safe ball that has won a winning opening, normally, if the value of the total winning counter is updated by +1 due to the winning of a game ball, the game ball is detected by the out switch 98. The value of the out counter area is updated by +1. The difference is calculated as the value of the out counter area is updated. Here, since the value of the total winning number counter area and the value of the out counter area are both 1, the difference is 0, and the value of the difference counter area is updated since it is smaller than 1 which is the value of the difference counter area before updating. However, 1 is maintained.

  Next, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98 (a4). In this update, an out ball discharged from the out port 30a without winning any of the winning ports is detected by the out switch 98. The difference is calculated with this update, but the difference is −1, which is smaller than the value of the difference counter area before the update, so that the value of the difference counter area is maintained.

  Thereafter, the updating of the value of the total winning number counter area based on the detection signal from the winning opening continues (a5 to a7). The difference is calculated every time this update is performed. However, the difference is 2 at a7, which is larger than 1 which is the value of the difference counter area before the update, so that the value of the difference counter area is updated to 2. When only the value of the total winning number counter area increases as described above, it may occur even in a state where the game ball has won the winning opening in a short time and has not yet been detected by the out switch 98 as in the special game state. It is also conceivable that only the detection at the winning opening occurs due to a fraudulent act by the line fishing ball. As described above, the value of the total winning number counter area increases and the difference increases. When the difference value exceeds the number of out-number error occurrence determinations (for example, 13), it is determined that an out-number error has occurred.

  FIG. 104B shows a case where an out-number error occurs. In this example, first, the value of the total winning number counter area is 52, the value of the out counter area is 40, and the value of the difference counter area is 12 (b1). Then, the value of the total winning number counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the winning opening, the value of the difference counter area becomes 13 (b2), and further based on the detection signal from the winning opening, The value is updated by +1 and the value of the difference counter area becomes 14, which exceeds the out-number error occurrence determination number of 13 (b3). As a result, it is determined that an out-number error has occurred, and an out-number error notification state in which an abnormality is notified is set. The out-number error notification state is continued for a predetermined time (here, 60000 ms) from when it is determined that the out-number error has occurred.

  After it is determined that an out-number error has occurred, the value of the difference counter area is changed to 13 which is the out-number error occurrence determination number (b4). Here, thereafter, the value of the total winning number counter area is further updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the winning opening (b5). The difference is calculated based on this update, and since it is larger than the value of the difference counter area before the update, 15 which is the value of the calculated difference is set in the difference counter area. With the setting of this difference, it is determined that an out-number error has occurred again, and the notification period of the out-number error notification state is reset (extended).

  After it is determined that an out-number error has occurred, the value of the difference counter area is changed to 13 which is the out-number error occurrence determination number (b6). Thereafter, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98, and the difference is calculated. In this case, however, the difference is 14, and the out number error is determined again (b7).

  As described above, after the out-number error is determined to have occurred, the value of the difference counter area is determined as the out-number error occurrence determination number, and the abnormality monitoring is continuously performed even during the notification period, so that the out-number error is determined. When a detection signal is further input from the winning opening after it is determined that the error has occurred, it is possible to immediately determine that there is an out-number error. Further, when a detection signal is further input from the winning opening after it is determined that an out-number error has occurred, the notification period is extended so that it takes a long time to cancel the out-number error. The out-number error occurs when the number of detection signals from the winning opening is abnormally large, and is a state in which there is a high possibility that an illegal act is performed in the winning opening. If a detection signal is generated from the winning opening even after the out-number error has occurred, there is a high possibility that the wrongdoing has been continued. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the out-number error notification state from being easily released, thereby preventing the fraudulent activity from continuing.

  After it is determined that an out-number error has occurred, the value of the difference counter area is changed to 13 which is the out-number error occurrence determination number (b8). Thereafter, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98, and the difference is calculated (b9). Here, the difference is 13, and it is not determined that an out-number error has occurred.

  Then, the state where it is not determined that an out-number error has occurred continues, and when a predetermined time elapses from the last time when it is determined that an out-number error has occurred (b7), the out-number error notification state is released and the notification period is reduced. finish. With the release of the out-number error notification state, the value of the difference counter area is cleared to 0 (b10). However, the value of the total winning number counter area and the value of the out counter area are not cleared.

  Thereafter, when a detection signal from the winning opening or a detection signal from the out switch 98 is input, a difference is calculated. Here, the difference is calculated based on the input of the detection signal from the out switch 98, and 9 of the calculated difference is set in the difference counter area. The difference counter area is updated when the calculated difference number is larger than the held value, so that the update in which the value decreases is not performed. For this reason, the value of the area of the difference counter is cleared with the release of the out-number error notification state, and the abnormal state is once released reliably. Also, by clearing only the value of the difference counter area without clearing the value of the total winning number counter area or the value of the out counter area, the difference number at the subsequent timing (b11) is reflected in the difference counter area. Like that. It should be noted that the value of the total winning number counter area, the value of the out counter area, and the value of the difference counter area may all be cleared to 0 with the release of the out number error notification state.

  FIG. 104 (c) shows a case where the value of the out counter area overflows. The out counter area of the present embodiment can take a value of 0 to 255 as a value, and returns to 0 when +1 is updated in the state of the maximum value of 255. In this example, first, the value of the out counter area is 254 (c1), and the detection signal from the out switch 98 is input, and the value of the out counter area becomes the maximum value of 255 (c2). From this state, a detection signal is further input from the out switch 98, and the value of the out counter area overflows and becomes 0 (c3). With the overflow of the out counter area, the value 5 of the difference counter area is set in the total winning number counter area (d4). Note that the value in the difference counter area is maintained as it is.

  If the value of the total winning number counter area is maintained as it is when the value of the out counter area overflows, if the value of the total winning number counter area exceeds 13 which is the number of out-number error occurrence determinations, immediate out is performed. It is determined that a number error has occurred, causing inconvenience. However, if the value of the total winning number counter area is also cleared to 0, the difference also becomes 0, and the detection of occurrence of the out-number error is delayed. Therefore, by setting the value of the difference counter area as the value of the total winning number counter area, the state of the difference before the occurrence of the overflow is maintained, and the monitoring of the occurrence of the out-number error can be continued without change before and after the overflow. ing.

  FIG. 104 (d) shows a case where the value of the total winning number counter area overflows. The total winning number counter area of this embodiment can take a value of 0 to 255, and returns to 0 when +1 is updated in the state of the maximum value of 255. In this example, first, the value of the total winning number counter area is 254 (d1), and the detection signal from the winning opening is input, and the value of the total winning number counter area becomes the maximum value of 255 (d2). From this state, a detection signal is further input from the winning opening, and the value of the total winning number counter area overflows and becomes 0 (d3). With the overflow of the total winning number counter area, 5 which is the value of the difference counter area is set in the total winning number counter area (d4). Further, the value in the difference counter area is maintained as it is, and the value in the out counter area is cleared and set to 0.

  In this way, as in the case where the value of the out counter area overflows, the state of the difference before the overflow occurs is maintained, and the monitoring of the occurrence of the out-number error can be continued without change before and after the overflow. I have.

  In view of the above, a game area in which a game ball can flow down in a gaming machine that generates a state advantageous to a player when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result. 32, and a prize area provided in the game area 32, in which a game ball can be won (a first start prize port 36, a normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37, a second start prize port 97, a first special variable prize apparatus 38, a second special prize apparatus). A variable winning device 39, a general winning opening 35), and a winning detection sensor (a starting opening 1 switch 36a, a starting opening 2 switch 37a, a starting opening 3 switch 97a, a top winning opening switch) capable of detecting a game ball winning a winning area. 38a, a lower big winning opening switch 39a, a winning opening switch 35a), a discharge sensor (out switch 98) capable of detecting a game ball discharged from the game area 32, a winning detection sensor and a discharge sensor. Control means (game control device 100) for performing control based on a detection signal from the game device, the control means comprising: a total winning number counter (game control device 100) for counting the number of detections by the winning detection sensor; A total discharge number counter (game control device 100) for counting the number of detections by the sensor, and a calculating means (game control device) for calculating a difference number in which the value of the total winning number counter exceeds the value of the total discharge number counter 100), and when the difference number exceeds a predetermined number, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, fraudulent acts can be reliably detected.

  Further, the control means includes a difference counter (game control device 100) capable of holding the difference number calculated by the calculation means, and the difference counter has a maximum value of the calculated difference number until the difference number exceeds a predetermined number. When the total discharge number counter is reset, the value of the difference counter is set in the total winning number counter, and the value of the difference counter is kept as it is. Therefore, fraudulent acts can be reliably detected.

  Further, the control means is configured to execute an abnormality notification for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality over a predetermined notification period when the difference number exceeds a predetermined number, and reset the value of the difference counter with the end of the notification period. I am trying to do it. Therefore, the abnormal state is surely released with the end of the notification period.

  Further, the control means keeps the values of the total winning number counter and the total discharging number counter even if the value of the difference counter is reset at the end of the notification period. Therefore, the actual difference number is reflected on the difference counter after the end of the notification period.

  Further, the control means can calculate the difference number by the calculating means based on the updated value of the total winning number counter or the total discharge number counter and hold the difference number in the difference counter. Is configured to notify the occurrence of an abnormality when the number exceeds a predetermined number, and the value of the difference counter is set to a predetermined number based on the determination that the abnormality has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to immediately detect the abnormality again after the abnormality is detected, and it is possible to reliably detect the fraud. In the above-described embodiment, the predetermined number set in the difference counter area based on the occurrence of the abnormality is set as the out-number error determination number, but may be another value.

  Further, the control means is configured to execute an abnormality notification for notifying the occurrence of the abnormality over a predetermined notification period, and the calculation means when the value of the total winning number counter or the total discharge number counter is updated even during the notification period. Thus, the difference number can be calculated and the difference number can be held in the difference counter. Therefore, it is possible to immediately detect the abnormality again after the abnormality is detected, and it is possible to reliably detect the fraud.

  If the control means determines that the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined number during the notification period and an abnormality occurs, the control unit extends the notification period based on the determination. Therefore, it is possible to prevent continuation of the fraud by preventing the notification of the abnormality from easily ending. Here, the extension of the notification period may be such that the remaining notification period is cleared and a new notification period is set based on the occurrence of a new abnormality, or a predetermined notification period may be set in addition to the remaining notification period. May be set. Further, the time extended based on the occurrence of a new abnormality may be the same time regardless of the number of times the extension is performed, or may be different depending on the number of times the extension is performed. The longer the number of times is performed, the longer the extended time may be.

  The difference calculation process may be performed only in the winning counter update process, and may not be performed in the status display edit output process. The difference calculation process (step X806) in the status display edit output process is performed when there is an input to the out switch 98, and only changes the value in a direction in which no out number error occurs. There is no problem even if the difference calculation process is omitted.

  When the value of the total winning number counter area or the out counter area overflows, the value of the out counter area is set to 0. However, the value of the difference counter area may be set to the value of the out counter area. good.

  Further, although the value of the difference counter area is maintained at the maximum value as compared with the value before update, the calculated difference may be set as it is. Further, when it is determined that an out-number error has occurred, the value of the difference counter area is changed to the out-number error occurrence determination number. However, the value may be changed to a smaller value, or may be cleared to zero. good. Further, when it is determined that an out-number error has occurred, all of the value of the total winning number counter area, the value of the out counter area, and the value of the difference counter area may be changed to the out-number error occurrence determination number. Good, it may be changed to a smaller value, or it may be cleared to zero.

  Also, in the out-number error notification state, the value of the total winning number counter area, the value of the out counter area, and the value of the difference counter area are updated, but in the out-number error notification state, the values of all areas are updated. It may not be done. In the out-number error notification state, the payout based on the winning in the winning opening may not be performed.

  Further, the number of out-number error occurrence determinations may be changed according to a predetermined condition. For example, the out-number error occurrence determination number may be changed according to the game state. Examples of the game state include a state where no time is saved, a state where time is saved, a special game state, and the like. In the time reduction state, the frequency of winning is higher than in the no time reduction state, and in the special game state, the frequency of winning is higher than in the time reduction state. For this reason, in the time reduction state or the special game state, the number of out-number error occurrence determinations may be made larger than in the time reduction state. Further, the number of out-number error occurrence determinations may be made larger in the special game state than in the time reduction state.

  In this case, when shifting to the gaming state in which the out-number error occurrence determination number is small, if the value of the difference counter area before the shift exceeds the out-number error occurrence determination number in the gaming state after the shift, There is a possibility that it is determined that an out-number error has occurred. For this reason, the value of the difference counter area is changed to a value equal to or less than the out-number error occurrence determination number in the game state after the transition with the transition.

  Further, all of the value of the total winning number counter area, the value of the out counter area, and the value of the difference counter area may be cleared to 0 at regular intervals. The certain time is, for example, a time earlier than the time required for the value of the out counter area to reach the upper limit value when the game ball is continuously fired.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the total winning number counter, the out counter, and the difference counter are used, but an out-number error may be detected by one counter. In this case, the counter is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98, and the counter is updated by -1 based on the detection signal from the winning opening. If the number is less than the number, it is determined that an out-number error has occurred.

  Further, in this case, since the detection signal from the out switch 98 is normally larger than the detection signal from the winning opening, it becomes more difficult to detect the occurrence of the out number error as the time elapses from the state where the counter is 0. . Therefore, the upper limit value of the counter may be set to a not so large value (for example, 255) so that an opportunity to be set to 0 due to overflow occurs at a constant frequency. Further, the counter may be cleared to 0 every time a certain period elapses.

  Also, when the difference exceeds the number of out-number error occurrence determinations, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.However, when the difference is equal to or greater than the out-number error occurrence determination number, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. The determination method and the number of out-number error occurrence determinations may be arbitrarily selected. Further, when performing processing by comparing the obtained value with the determination value, not limited to the determination of the out-number error, whether the value exceeds the determination value may be used as a determination criterion, and the value may be more than the determination value. May be used as a criterion.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. In the gaming machine of the present modification, a variation pattern for executing a skip effect in the game control device 100 can be selected.

  105 and 106 show the variation patterns of the special figure variation display game. FIG. 105 shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in which the types and the selectivity of the fluctuation patterns in the normal gaming state (low probability state) are defined. Note that a common variation pattern table is used in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. FIGS. 105 (a) to (c) are the same as FIGS. 105 (a) to (c) of the first embodiment. The gaming machine of this modification includes the big hit variation pattern table 2 of FIG. 105 (d) and the small hit variation pattern table 2 of FIG. 105 (e).

  The jackpot variation pattern table 1 of FIG. 105 (b) and the jackpot variation pattern table 2 of FIG. 105 (d) are different in that there is a variation pattern without reach in the jackpot variation pattern table 2 of FIG. 105 (d). Similarly, the small hit variation pattern table 1 in FIG. 105 (c) and the small hit variation pattern table 2 in FIG. 105 (e) have a variation pattern without reach in the small hit variation pattern table 2 in FIG. 105 (e). The points are different.

  FIG. 106 shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in which the type and the selectivity of the fluctuation pattern in the specific game state (high probability state) are defined. Note that a common variation pattern table is used in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. FIGS. 106 (a) to (c) are the same as FIGS. 106 (a) to (c) of the first embodiment. The gaming machine of this modification includes a large hit variation pattern table 2 of FIG. 106 (d) and a small hit variation pattern table 2 of FIG. 106 (e).

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern table 1 of FIG. 106 (b) and the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 2 of FIG. 106 (d) are different in that there is a fluctuation pattern without reach in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 2 of FIG. 106 (d). Similarly, the small hit variation pattern table 1 in FIG. 106 (c) and the small hit variation pattern table 2 in FIG. 106 (e) have a variation pattern without reach in the small hit variation pattern table 2 in FIG. 106 (e). The points are different.

  The fluctuation pattern table 2 shown in FIGS. 105 (d), (e), 106 (d), and (e) can be selected when the other special figure fluctuation display game is being executed. In this situation, since the short-time fluctuation pattern without the reach can be selected, the possibility that the special figure fluctuation display game to be hit stops before the other special figure fluctuation display game increases, and the skip effect It is easy to execute.

  The variation time of the variation pattern without reach is set to 4000 ms. As shown in FIG. 94, the fluctuation time is 3000 ms, which is the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t11 to t13 in FIG. 94), and the decorative special figure fluctuation display game when the effect button is not pressed in the skip effect. In the display unit 85, the time is equal to the time (4000 ms) obtained by adding 1000 ms, which is the time (t13 to t14 in FIG. 94) required to stop the identification information due to the deviation result.

  When this variation pattern is selected, the effect control device 300 starts the skip effect immediately with the start of the special figure variation display game. In addition, when the skip effect is performed with the variation pattern selected and the effect button 25 is not operated, the special result is stopped in the stop mode in which the identification information is stopped in the same manner as the stop mode in the case of the loss result. To be. As a result, if the special figure in which the fluctuation pattern is selected is the main fluctuation pattern, the skip effect is started in a state where the identification information is rapidly changing in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display section 85.

[Special figure information setting processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the special figure information setting processing shown in FIG. 107 is performed instead of the special figure information setting processing shown in FIG. In this special map information setting process, in either the low probability state or the high probability state, if the result is a big hit or a small hit (step Y404; Y, step Y405; Y, step Y414; N), the other It is determined whether the special figure change display game is changing (step Y415).

  If the other special figure change display game is not changing (step Y415; N), the process moves to step Y412. If the other special figure change display game is changing (step Y415; Y), it is determined whether the remaining change time of the other special figure change display game is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (step Y416). This predetermined time is, as shown in FIG. 94, the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t11 to t13 in FIG. 94), and the decorative special figure change display game display unit 85 when the effect button is not pressed in the skip effect. This is the sum of the time (t13 and t14 in FIG. 94) required to stop the identification information due to the deviation result.

If the remaining fluctuation time of the other special figure fluctuation display game is not equal to or longer than the predetermined time (step Y416; N), the process proceeds to step Y412.
If the remaining fluctuation time of the other special figure fluctuation display game is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (step Y416; Y), the value is converted by adding the conversion value to Table 2 to the first half offset data (step Y417). Then, the conversion value to Table 2 is added to the second half offset data to convert the value (step Y418), and the process proceeds to step Y412.

  As a result, in a situation where a skip effect can be executed, the fluctuation pattern table 2 of FIGS. 105 (d), (e), 106 (d), and (e) is set according to the probability state and the result. . In these fluctuation pattern tables 2, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 4000 ms can be selected without a reach.

  In addition, even if the other special figure change display game is not changing (step Y415; N) or the remaining change time of the other special figure change display game is not longer than a predetermined time (step Y416; N), When the other start memory is present, the other special figure variation display game is continuously executed, so that the process may proceed to step Y416. In the variation pattern table 2 shown in FIGS. 105 (d), (e), 106 (d), and (e), only the variation pattern without reach may be selectable.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. In the gaming machine of the present modified example, when a prize is won, a certain grace period is provided before calculating the difference.

  FIG. 108A shows an example of a change in a value in each counter area in the above-described first embodiment. This example has the same contents as FIG. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1 based on the detection of the game ball winning one of the winning openings and the detection signal being input (a2), and the difference is accordingly increased. Is calculated. Here, since the value of the out counter area is 0, the difference is 1, and since it is larger than 0, which is the value of the difference counter area before updating, 1 is set in the difference counter area. Thereafter, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98 (a3). The difference is calculated as the value of the out counter area is updated. Here, since the value of the total winning number counter area and the value of the out counter area are both 1, the difference is 0, and the value of the difference counter area is updated since it is smaller than 1 which is the value of the difference counter area before updating. However, 1 is maintained.

  Since the safe ball that has won the winning opening is also detected by the out switch 98, if the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1 due to the winning of the game ball when the abnormal state is not abnormal, the game ball is thereafter switched to the out switch. As a result of the detection at 98, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1. Therefore, in this series of detections, both the total winning number counter area and the out counter area are updated by +1 and the actual difference number does not change from the value before winning.

  However, since there is a certain distance from the winning opening switch of each winning opening to the out switch 98, it takes a certain time from the input of the detection signal from the winning opening switch to the input of the detection signal from the out switch 98. Therefore, when the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1, the difference number is incremented by one (a2), and even when the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 (a3), the difference counter area maintains the maximum value. Is maintained as 1 and a difference from the actual difference number occurs.

  Therefore, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1 based on the detection signal being input when the game ball wins in one of the winning openings. (B2) The grace period (here, 5000 ms) is set without calculating the difference immediately. When the detection signal is input from the out switch 98 within the grace period, the difference calculation based on the winning (b2) to the winning opening is not performed. Thereby, the value of the difference counter area can be set to a value corresponding to the substantial difference (b3).

  In addition, after a game ball has won one of the winning ports and a detection signal is input, the value of the total winning counter is updated by +1 and a grace period is set (b4). If the detection signal is not input from the switch 98, the difference is calculated, and if the calculation result is larger than the value of the difference counter area, the calculation result is stored in the difference counter area (b6). Accordingly, when an illegal act that only occurs at the winning opening switch occurs, such as an illegal act by a line fishing ball, the value of the difference counter area increases, and the number of out-number error occurrence determinations (for example, 13) Is exceeded, the number of outs error is determined.

[Winning counter update process]
In this modification, a winning number counter updating process shown in FIG. 109 is performed instead of the winning number counter updating process shown in FIG. In the winning number counter updating process, instead of the difference calculating process (step X365), the initial value of the grace timer is saved in the grace timer area (step X871), and the value of the in-counter area is updated by +1 (step X872). .

  The grace timer is for managing the grace period, and here, 5000 ms is set as an initial value. This time is a sufficient time from when the game ball is detected by the winning switch of each winning opening to when it is detected by the out switch 98. The in-counter area is a counter for counting the number of winnings for which the calculation of the difference is deferred, and as described later, a winning is made based on the same number of detections of the out switches 98 as the value of the in-counter area. It is determined that the game ball has been discharged.

[Status display edit output processing]
Also, the status display editing output processing shown in FIG. 110 is performed in place of the status display editing output processing shown in FIG. In this state display edit output processing, first, it is determined whether the grace timer is 0 (step X881), and if it is 0 (step X881; Y), the process proceeds to step X801. In this case, the grace timer is already 0 and it is out of the grace period.

  If the grace timer is not 0 (step X881; N), that is, if it is within the grace period, the grace timer is updated by -1 (step X882), and it is determined whether the grace timer has become 0 (step X883). . If the grace timer has not reached 0 (step X883; N), that is, if the grace period has not expired, it is determined whether there is an input to the out switch (step X884). If there is no input to the out switch (step X884; N), the process proceeds to step X801.

  If there is an input to the out switch (step X884; Y), the value of the in-counter area is updated by -1 (step X885), and it is determined whether the value of the in-counter area has become 0 (step X886). If the value of the in-counter area is not 0 (step X886; N), the flow shifts to step X801. If the value of the in-counter area is 0 (step X886; Y), that is, if the discharge of the game ball corresponding to the winning number for which the calculation of the difference has been suspended is detected, the grace timer area is cleared to 0. Then (step X887), and the process proceeds to step X801. This ends the grace period.

  On the other hand, when the grace timer has reached 0 (step X883; Y), that is, when the grace period has expired, a difference calculation process is performed (step X888). This difference calculation process is the process shown in FIG. Thereafter, the in-counter area is cleared to 0 (step X889), the grace timer area is cleared to 0 (step X890), and the process proceeds to step X801.

  In this state display editing output processing, when there is an input to the out switch (step X801; Y), and when the out counter area does not overflow (step X805; N), the difference calculation processing (step X806) performed when the out counter area does not overflow is not performed. Like that. The difference calculation process (step X806) is performed when the value of the out counter area increases and the value changes in a direction in which the out-number error does not occur. Of course, a difference calculation process may be performed.

  Further, in the above description, the difference calculation process is not performed in the winning number counter updating process, and the detection by the winning opening switch is not immediately reflected in the difference number. May be calculated and the timing of reflecting the calculation result in the difference counter area may be delayed. When the same number of out switches 98 are detected as the winnings during the grace period, the calculation results are discarded.

  When the value of the in-counter area exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 20), the difference calculation processing may be performed without setting the grace period. If a new prize occurs during the grace period, a new grace period will be set from the prize, but if the period during which the prize is not reflected in the difference number becomes too long, detection of fraud may be delayed Therefore, when the grace period is reset a predetermined number of times, the difference calculation process may be performed without setting the grace period, and the abnormality may be detected.

  Further, when the game ball detected by the winning opening switch is discharged, a winning ball out switch for detecting the game ball may be provided separately from the out switch 98. In the above-described example, the detection by the out switch 98 does not distinguish whether the detection is due to a game ball (safe ball) winning the winning opening or a game ball (out ball) discharged from the out opening 30a. For example, even if a game ball discharged from the out port 30a is detected by the out switch 98 within the grace period after the detection by the winning port switch, it is regarded as normal. By providing a winning ball out switch, it is possible to confirm the discharge of game balls that have won the winning opening, and if it is detected by the winning opening switch, if it is detected by the winning ball out switch within the grace period, it is regarded as normal This makes it possible to determine fraudulent acts more accurately.

  Note that the out switch 98 may detect a game ball detected by the winning ball out switch, or may not detect a game ball detected by the winning ball out switch. When the out switch 98 also detects a game ball detected by the winning ball out switch, only the detection by the out switch 98 is counted in the out counter area. When the out switch 98 does not detect a game ball detected by the winning ball out switch, a value obtained by adding both the detection by the out switch 98 and the detection by the winning ball out switch is used in the out counter area. Count it. In addition, the winning ball out switch may be a device that collectively detects the discharge of game balls winning each winning opening, or may detect the discharge of the winning game balls individually for each winning opening. Is also good.

  In view of the above, a game area in which a game ball can flow down in a gaming machine that generates a state advantageous to a player when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result. 32, and a prize area provided in the game area 32, in which a game ball can be won (a first start prize port 36, a normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37, a second start prize port 97, a first special variable prize apparatus 38, a second special prize apparatus). A variable winning device 39, a general winning opening 35), and a winning detection sensor (a starting opening 1 switch 36a, a starting opening 2 switch 37a, a starting opening 3 switch 97a, a top winning opening switch) capable of detecting a game ball winning a winning area. 38a, a lower big winning opening switch 39a, a winning opening switch 35a), a discharge sensor (out switch 98) capable of detecting a game ball discharged from the game area 32, a winning detection sensor and a discharge sensor. Control means (game control device 100) for performing control based on a detection signal from the game device, the control means comprising: a total winning number counter (game control device 100) for counting the number of detections by the winning detection sensor; A total discharge number counter (game control device 100) for counting the number of detections by the sensor, and a calculating means (game control device) for calculating a difference number in which the value of the total winning number counter exceeds the value of the total discharge number counter 100), and is configured to notify the occurrence of an abnormality when the difference number exceeds a predetermined number. Until a predetermined grace period elapses from the detection by the prize detection sensor, the prize detection sensor is used. Is not reflected in the number of differences. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the difference from the substantial difference number from occurring, and it is possible to reliably detect the fraudulent activity and prevent the erroneous detection.

  Also, the control means, during the grace period, when the discharge sensor has detected the same number as the number detected by the winning detection sensor that is gracefully reflected in the difference number, the grace period ends. It is done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the grace period from continuing more than necessary.

  Further, the control means suspends the reflection in the difference number when the detection number in the discharge sensor is less than the detection number in the winning detection sensor for which reflection in the delay number is suspended in the delay period. This means that a value obtained by subtracting the number detected by the discharge sensor during the grace period from the number detected by the winning detection sensor is reflected on the difference number. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect an improper act that is detected only by the winning detection sensor.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first modified example. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. The parts will be described. In the gaming machine of the present modified example, when a prize is won, a certain grace period is provided before calculating the difference.

[Winning counter update process]
In this modification, the status display editing output process shown in FIG. 111 is performed instead of the status display editing output process shown in FIG. In this state display edit output processing, when the grace timer is set to 0 and the grace period ends (step X883; Y), first, the value of the in-counter area is loaded instead of the difference calculation processing (step X888). (Step X901), the loaded value and the value of the difference counter area are added (Step X902), and the addition result is saved in the difference counter area (Step X903).

  As a result, the winning number that has not been detected by the out switch 98 corresponding to the detection by the winning opening switch is added to the value of the difference counter area. By doing so, the value of the difference counter area is increased in the case where a fraudulent act that only occurs at the winning opening switch, such as a fraudulent act due to a line fishing ball, is performed. When the number exceeds (for example, 13), it is determined that an out-number error has occurred. Further, since it is not necessary to provide a total winning number counter area or an out counter area, and further, it is not necessary to perform a difference calculation process, it is possible to reduce a load of control relating to detection of fraud.

  When the value of the in-counter area exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 20), the value of the in-counter area may be added to the value of the difference counter area without setting a grace period. If a new prize occurs during the grace period, a new grace period will be set from the prize, but if the period not reflected in the difference number becomes too long, the detection of fraud may be delayed, When the grace period is reset a predetermined number of times, the difference calculation process may be performed without setting the grace period, and the abnormality may be detected.

  Also, by adding the value of the in-counter area to the difference counter area, the values of the in-counter area remaining in a plurality of grace periods are added up, but the in-counter area remaining in one grace period is added. The occurrence of an abnormality may be determined based only on the value of. One grace period is a period from when the grace period is started in a state other than the grace period to when the grace timer becomes 0 or cleared to zero. If a new prize occurs during the grace period and a new grace period is set from the prize, the grace timer does not become 0, so the grace period before and after the new prize is a series of grace periods. Grace period.

  In view of the above, a game area in which a game ball can flow down in a gaming machine that generates a state advantageous to a player when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result. 32, and a prize area provided in the game area 32, in which a game ball can be won (a first start prize port 36, a normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37, a second start prize port 97, a first special variable prize apparatus 38, a second special prize apparatus). A variable winning device 39, a general winning opening 35), and a winning detection sensor (a starting opening 1 switch 36a, a starting opening 2 switch 37a, a starting opening 3 switch 97a, a top winning opening switch) capable of detecting a game ball winning a winning area. 38a, a lower big winning opening switch 39a, a winning opening switch 35a), a discharge sensor (out switch 98) capable of detecting a game ball discharged from the game area 32, a winning detection sensor and a discharge sensor. Control means (game control device 100) for performing control based on a detection signal from the game control device, the control means sets a predetermined grace period from the detection by the winning detection sensor, and sets a predetermined grace period from the discharge sensor during the grace period. Based on the absence of detection, the occurrence of an abnormality can be detected. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect a fraudulent act of illegally outputting a detection signal from the winning detection sensor.

  In addition, the control means resets the grace period based on a new detection by the winning detection sensor during the grace period, and the number of detections by the discharge sensor during the grace period determines the start and the restart of the grace period. If the number of detections is smaller than the number of detections of the winning detection sensor that triggered the setting, the occurrence of the abnormality is notified based on the number of the shortage being equal to or more than a predetermined number. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect a fraudulent act of illegally outputting a detection signal from the winning detection sensor.

  In addition, the number of shortages in a plurality of grace periods is totaled, and the occurrence of an abnormality is notified based on the total number being equal to or more than a predetermined number. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect a fraudulent act of illegally outputting a detection signal from the winning detection sensor.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. The gaming machine of the present modification is different in a method of setting a value when the counter overflows. Further, the difference counter area is not used.

[Winning counter update process]
In this modified example, a winning number counter updating process shown in FIG. 112 is performed instead of the winning number counter updating process shown in FIG. In this winning number counter updating process, when an overflow occurs in the total winning number counter area (step X363; Y), a difference calculating process is performed (step X911). In this difference calculation process, as shown in FIG. 113, the processes related to the difference counter area (steps X824 and X825) performed in the difference calculation process of FIG. 102 are not performed.

  Returning to FIG. 112, after performing the difference calculation process (step X911), the difference calculation result is updated by +1 (step X912). Since the winning that caused the overflow is not reflected in the calculation of the difference, the difference calculation result is updated by +1 here so as to be reflected in the number of differences. Then, it is determined whether the difference calculation result is greater than 0 (step X913).

  If the difference calculation result is larger than 0 (Step X913; Y), the difference calculation result is saved in the total winning number counter area (Step X915). If the difference calculation result is not larger than 0 (Step X913; N), the difference calculation result is set to 0 (Step X914), and the difference calculation result is saved in the total winning number counter area (Step X915). After that, 0 is saved in the out counter area (step X367), and the processing after step X368 is performed.

  The difference calculation process (step X365) performed when the total winning number counter area does not overflow (step X363; N) is not performed here, but is performed in the out-number error monitoring process shown in FIG. 115 described later. ing.

[Status display edit output processing]
Also, the status display editing output processing shown in FIG. 114 is performed in place of the status display editing output processing shown in FIG. In this state display editing output processing, when overflow of the out counter area occurs (step X804; Y), a difference calculation processing is performed (step X921). This difference calculation process is the process shown in FIG. 113 described above.

  Returning to FIG. 114, after performing the difference calculation process (step X921), the difference calculation result is updated by -1 (step X922). In the calculation of the difference, the detection by the out switch 98 that caused the overflow is not reflected. Here, the difference calculation result is updated by −1 so as to be reflected in the number of differences. Then, it is determined whether the difference calculation result is larger than 0 (step X923).

  If the difference calculation result is larger than 0 (Step X923; Y), the difference calculation result is saved in the total winning number counter area (Step X925). If the difference calculation result is not larger than 0 (Step X923; N), the difference calculation result is set to 0 (Step X924), and the difference calculation result is saved in the total winning number counter area (Step X925). After that, 0 is saved in the out counter area (step X808), and the processing after step X809 is performed.

  The difference calculation process (step X806) performed when the out counter area does not overflow (step X804; N) is not performed here, but is performed in the out-number error monitoring process shown in FIG. 115 described later. .

  By the above processing, even if the total winning number counter area or the out counter area overflows, the information of the difference before the overflow is carried over, and the monitoring of the fraud can be continuously performed. When the difference calculation result is not larger than 0 (steps X913 and X923; N), the difference calculation result is set to 0, so that the misconduct can be reliably detected. In other words, when the game is being played normally, the number detected by the out switch 98 is larger than the number detected by the winning opening switch, so that the difference greatly deviates from the number of out-number error occurrence determinations. If fraud is started in this state, the period until the difference reaches the out-number error occurrence determination number may become longer and detection of fraud may be delayed, but if the difference calculation result is not greater than 0, the difference calculation is performed. By setting the result to 0, fraudulent acts can be reliably detected.

[Out number error monitoring processing]
Also, an out-number error monitoring process shown in FIG. 115 is performed instead of the out-number error monitoring process shown in FIG. In the out-number error monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the out-number error notification timer is 0 (step X931). If the value of the out-number error notification timer is 0 (step X931; Y), That is, if no out-number error has occurred, a difference calculation process is performed (step X933). This difference calculation process is the process shown in FIG. 113 described above.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the difference calculation result is greater than the number of out-number error occurrence determinations (step X934). If the difference calculation result is greater than the number of out-number error occurrence determinations (step X934; Y), that is, an out number error has occurred. If it is determined that, the processing after step X844 is performed. If the difference calculation result is not larger than the out-number-error occurrence determination number (step X934; N), that is, if no out-number error has occurred, the processing in step X847 and thereafter is performed.

  On the other hand, when the value of the out-number error notification timer is not 0 (step X931; N), that is, when the out-number error occurs and the notification is performed, the value of the total winning number counter area or the value of the out counter area is set. It is determined whether there is a change (step X932). When there is a change in the value of the total winning number counter area or the value of the out counter area (step X932; Y), the processing after step X933 is performed. In this case, if the difference calculation result is larger than the out-number error occurrence determination number (step X934; Y), the notification of the out-number error is reset. If there is no change in the value of the total winning number counter area or the value of the out counter area (step X932; N), the processing after step X847 is performed. The determination of whether the value of the out-number error notification timer is 0 (step X931) may not be performed.

  When the value of the out-number error notification timer becomes 0 (step X851; Y), that is, the value of the out-number error notification timer becomes 0 in the current out-number error monitoring process, and the out-number error becomes zero. If it is to be released, 0 is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X935), 0 is saved in the out counter area (step X936), and the processing in step X853 and thereafter is performed.

  FIG. 116 shows an example of a change in a value in each counter area for detecting an out-number error. In this modification, since no difference counter area is provided, the column of difference means a difference calculation result. As shown in a1 of FIG. 104 (a), when the values of the total winning number counter area and the out counter area are 0, the difference is also 0 (a1). In this state, when a detection signal is input from any winning opening, the value of the total winning counter is updated by +1 (a2). Here, since the value of the out counter area is 0, the difference calculation result is 1.

  Thereafter, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98 (a3). Here, since the value of the total winning number counter area and the value of the out counter area are both 1, the difference calculation result is 0. Next, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98 (a4). In this update, an out ball discharged from the out port 30a without winning any of the winning ports is detected by the out switch 98. With this update, the difference calculation result becomes −1. Thereafter, if the value of the total winning number counter area is continuously updated based on the detection signal from the winning opening (a5 to a7), the difference calculation result increases accordingly. As described above, the difference calculation result is a value corresponding to the value of the counter at the time of calculation.

  FIG. 116B shows a case where an out-number error occurs. In this example, first, the value of the total winning number counter area is 52, the value of the out counter area is 40, and the value of the difference counter area is 12 (b1). Then, the value of the total winning number counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the winning opening, the difference calculation result becomes 13 (b2), and the value of the total winning number counter area is changed based on the detection signal from the winning opening. +1 is updated, and the difference calculation result becomes 14, which exceeds 13 which is the out-number error occurrence determination number (b3). As a result, it is determined that an out-number error has occurred, and an out-number error notification state in which an abnormality is notified is set. The out-number error notification state is continued for a predetermined time (here, 60000 ms) from when it is determined that the out-number error has occurred.

  In this modification, since the difference counter area is not used, the process of setting the difference to the number of out-number error occurrence determinations after determining that the out-number error has occurred is not performed. If the value of the total winning number counter area or the out counter area does not change during the out number error notification state, the difference is not calculated (b4).

  Further, in the out-number error notification state, the value of the total winning number counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the winning opening (b5). The difference is calculated based on this update, and the difference calculation result is 15. Since the difference calculation result exceeds the number-of-out-number-error occurrence determination number 13, it is determined that the out-number error has occurred again, and the notification period of the out-number error notification state is reset (extended). Thereafter, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98, and the difference is calculated. In this case also, the difference calculation result is 14, and the out number error is determined again (b7).

  Then, based on the detection signal from the out switch 98, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 to calculate the difference (b9). Here, the difference calculation result is 13, and it is determined that the out number error has occurred. Not done. As described above, the state in which the out-number error is not determined continues, and the out-number error notification state is released and the notification period is canceled when a predetermined time elapses from the last time (b7) when it is determined that the out-number error has occurred. Ends. With the release of the out-number error notification state, the value of the total winning number counter area and the value of the out counter area are cleared to 0 (b10).

  FIG. 116 (c) shows a case where the value of the out counter area overflows. The out-counter area of this modified example can take a value of 0 to 255 as a value, and returns to 0 when +1 is updated in the state of the maximum value of 255. In this example, first, the value of the out counter area is 254 (c1), and the detection signal from the out switch 98 is input, and the value of the out counter area becomes the maximum value of 255 (c2).

  When a detection signal is further input from the out switch 98 from this state, the value of the out counter area overflows, and a corresponding process is performed. First, the difference is calculated without updating the out counter area (c3). Then, the difference calculation result is updated by -1 (c4), and it is determined whether the difference calculation result is larger than 0. Here, since the difference calculation result is 0 or less, the difference calculation result is set to 0 (c5). Thereafter, 0, which is the difference calculation result, is set in the total winning number counter area, and the out counter area is cleared to 0 (c6).

  When the maximum value of the total winning number counter area is larger than the maximum value of the out counter area, the difference calculation result in the process when the value of the out counter area overflows may be larger than 0. Conceivable. FIG. 116 (d) shows an example of such a case.

  In this example, first, the value of the total winning number counter area is 260, the value of the out counter area is 254 (d1), and the detection signal is input from the out switch 98, and the value of the out counter area is maximized. The value is 255 (d2). When a detection signal is further input from the out switch 98 from this state, the value of the out counter area overflows, and a corresponding process is performed. First, the difference is calculated without updating the out counter area (d3). Then, the difference calculation result is updated by -1 (d4), and it is determined whether the difference calculation result is larger than 0. Here, since the difference calculation result is larger than 0, the difference calculation result is set as it is in the total winning number counter area, and the out counter area is cleared to 0 (c5).

  FIG. 116 (e) shows a case where the value of the total winning number counter area overflows. The total winning number counter area of this embodiment can take a value of 0 to 255, and returns to 0 when +1 is updated in the state of the maximum value of 255. In this example, first, the value of the total winning number counter area is 254 (e1), and the detection signal from the winning opening is input, and the value of the total winning number counter area becomes the maximum value of 255 (e2).

  When a detection signal is further input from the winning opening from this state, the value of the total winning number counter area overflows, and a corresponding process is performed. First, the difference is calculated without updating the value of the total winning number counter area (e3). Then, the difference calculation result is updated by +1 (e4), and it is determined whether the difference calculation result is larger than 0. Here, since the difference calculation result is larger than 0, the difference calculation result is directly set in the total winning number counter area, and the out counter area is cleared to 0 (e5).

  If the maximum value that the out counter area can take is larger than the maximum value that the total winning number counter area can take, the difference calculation result in the process when the value of the total winning number counter area overflows becomes 0 or less. It is also possible. FIG. 116 (f) shows an example of such a case.

  In this example, first, the value of the total winning number counter area is 254, the value of the out counter area is 260 (f1), and the detection signal from the winning opening is input, and the value of the total winning number counter area is changed. The maximum value is 255 (f2). When a detection signal is further input from the winning opening from this state, the value of the total winning number counter area overflows, and a corresponding process is performed. First, the difference is calculated without updating the total winning number counter area (f3). Then, the difference calculation result is updated by +1 (f4), and it is determined whether the difference calculation result is larger than 0. Here, since the difference calculation result is 0 or less, the difference calculation result is set to 0 (f5), the difference calculation result is set to 0 in the total winning number counter area, and the out counter area is cleared to 0 (f6).

  In view of the above, a game area in which a game ball can flow down in a gaming machine that generates a state advantageous to a player when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result. 32, and a prize area provided in the game area 32, in which a game ball can be won (a first start prize port 36, a normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37, a second start prize port 97, a first special variable prize apparatus 38, a second special prize apparatus). A variable winning device 39, a general winning opening 35), and a winning detection sensor (a starting opening 1 switch 36a, a starting opening 2 switch 37a, a starting opening 3 switch 97a, a top winning opening switch) capable of detecting a game ball winning a winning area. 38a, a lower big winning opening switch 39a, a winning opening switch 35a), a discharge sensor (out switch 98) capable of detecting a game ball discharged from the game area 32, a winning detection sensor and a discharge sensor. Control means (game control device 100) for performing control based on a detection signal from the game device, the control means comprising: a total winning number counter (game control device 100) for counting the number of detections by the winning detection sensor; A total discharge number counter (game control device 100) for counting the number of detections by the sensor, and a calculating means (game control device) for calculating a difference number in which the value of the total winning number counter exceeds the value of the total discharge number counter 100), and is configured to notify the occurrence of an abnormality when the difference number exceeds a predetermined number, and when either the total winning number counter or the total discharge number counter overflows, the difference number is calculated. Then, when the difference number is larger than 0, the difference number is set to the total winning number counter value and the total emission number counter value is set to 0. When the difference number is 0 or less, the total winning number is set. Counter The fact that as both set to 0 the value of the total discharge number counter with. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect a fraudulent act of illegally outputting a detection signal from the winning detection sensor. Also, the counter can continuously monitor for fraud before and after the overflow.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as described in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, but includes, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. Further, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be appropriately combined and applied.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 32 gaming area 35 general winning opening (winning area)
35a winning opening switch (winning detection sensor)
36 1st starting winning opening (winning area)
36a Starting port 1 switch (winning detection sensor)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (winning area)
37a Starting port 2 switch (winning detection sensor)
38 1st Special Variable Winning Device (Winning Area)
38a Upper winning a prize mouth switch (winning detection sensor)
39 2nd special variable winning device (winning area)
39a Lower big winning opening switch (winning detection sensor)
97 2nd starting winning opening (winning area)
97a Starting port 3 switch (winning detection sensor)
98 Out switch (discharge sensor)
100 game control device (control means, total winning number counter, total discharge number counter, difference counter, calculating means)

Claims (4)

In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
A game area where game balls can flow down,
A prize area provided in the game area, in which a game ball can be awarded,
A prize detection sensor that can detect a game ball that has won the prize area,
An ejection sensor capable of detecting all game balls that have been fired in the game area and finished the game,
Control means for performing control based on a detection signal from the winning detection sensor and the discharge sensor,
The control means includes:
A total winning counter for counting the number of detections in the winning detection sensor,
A total discharge number counter for counting the number detected by the discharge sensor,
Calculating means for calculating a difference number in which the value of the total winning number counter exceeds the value of the total emission number counter;
A difference counter capable of holding the difference number calculated by the calculation means,
It is possible to calculate the difference number by the calculating means based on the value of the total winning number counter or the total discharge number counter being updated and hold the difference number in the difference counter, and the value of the difference counter is A gaming machine for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality when a predetermined number is exceeded. The control means includes:
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the value of the difference counter is reset based on the determination that the abnormality has occurred. The control means includes:
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein when the occurrence of the abnormality is determined, neither the value of the total winning number counter nor the value of the total discharging number counter is reset. The control means includes:
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a predetermined value is set in the difference counter based on the determination that the abnormality has occurred.

Images